Home

MELSEC-QS CC-Link IE Field Network Master

Contents

1. Set the same routing parameters 93 94 b When multiple master local modules with the same network number are connected to one system Set the station number of a module with the smallest slot number in Relay Station No In a multiple CPU system set the station number of a module with the smallest slot number regardless of the CPU number of the control CPU Network No 1 No 0 module No 1 No 2 No 3 No 0 Slot No 0 1 2 Network No 2 Set 1 in Relay Station No CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 4 Setting example The following shows an example to perform transient transmission from the station number 2 in the network number 1 to the station number 4 in the network number 3 CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 Master station Request source Station Station Station Station Station No 0 No 1 No 2 No 2 No 1 p000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Relay station 1 Relay station 2 Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station No 5 No 4 No 3 No 1 No 4 No 5 No 4 No 3 Network No 2 Request target Station Station No 2 No 3 Station Transient transmission request Transient transmission response No 2 network No network No No No 2 3 1 3 Goes through station No 3 of Station No 3 oa oa 1 Passes data to the request source on network No
2. Z Master station safety station Station No 0 wie Pog ws ee Communication disconnection and interlock Master station Local station Local station Local station safety station safety station standard station standard station Station No 0 Station No 3 Station No 2 Station No 1 28 CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK b During standard communication When a communication error occurs communication is automatically disconnected in order to prevent incorrect input output from to the faulty station When the disconnected station gets back to normal operation it automatically returns to the network and resumes data link lt _ gt Page 35 Section 3 3 1 Standard communication Master station Local station Local station Local station safety station safety station standard station standard station Station No 0 Station No 3 Station No 2 Station No 1 Communication is Win automatically i 7 disconnected y E i J e Master station Local station Local station Disconnection Local station safety station safety station standard station standard station Station No 0 Station No 3 Station No 2 Station No 1 When recovered from fault S9 NPO BOO T J9ISC ZL a Local station stand
3. PEN History Acquisition Setting Nevscccessccsecsssescsecscccsccsssecssssssssssssssccssssssccsseseeed History Acquisition Setting Event History Acquisition Setting Acquire and display the checked items in event history Ttems without checks will not be saved in event history Cannot select event that cannot be acquired in connected station Select All Select None Own Station Event Network Information Network Information Baton pass status variation I Data link status variation I Data link status variation I Temporary error invalid station setting status variation J Reception of Data Link Start Stop instruction J Execution of Data Link Start Stop instruction r Execution of temporary error invalid station Set Cancel instruction Reserved station setting status variation I Detection of PLC RUN status change Error Information IV Received Frame Error M Error in PLC M Parameter Error IV Master station overlap station No overlap IV Occurring path switch in using simple loopback Function Execution of reserved station temporary cancel Set VValid Set instruction Execute station No setting instruction to the station with no station No I Occurrence of parameter change J7 Detection of RUN status change in own station PLC Error Information Received Frame Error IV Error in own station module IV Error in own station PLC 6 Network Event History Network Eve
4. Transient transmission range Communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart number of relay stations 7 Setting for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks Routing parameters are not required for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks however setting the same routing parameters to all stations is recommended 1 Station which does not perform transient transmission It is recommended to set the same routing parameters as __ for 7 and _ can communicate by the same routing parameters since they pass through the same relay station Note that routing parameters need not to be set for stations for which routing parameters are not available e g station including a head module The station communicates with other networks according to routing parameters set to the master station 2 Checking method To check whether routing parameters have been correctly set and transient transmission can be performed perform a communication test from CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics _ gt Page 75 Section 6 4 3 3 Precautions siojowesedg Buynoy 7 2 a Different control CPUs are set to the network modules on a relay station in a multiple CPU system Set the same routing parameters to all the control CPUs 1 1 1 Control CPU setting 000000 o00000
5. Connected Station MasterSafety 0 LocalSafety 1 Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Network Event History Reserved Station Function Enable Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore Operation Test system Monitor Remote Operation Communication Test che b Reserving the slave station again Network Status Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter 2 Connected 2 Connected Station LocalSafety 2 MasterSafety 0 LocalSafety 1 P1 a E F Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station v Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station The Number o Stations Error Current Link Scan Time Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Network Event History Reserved Station Function Enable Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore Operation Test System Monitor Communication Test Remote Operation 142 Connect a slave station specified as a reserved station to the network Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics In Network Status right click the icon of the station for which reservation is to be cancelled Click Rese
6. RX offset size information System area RY offset size information System area Station No 1 RX offset Station No 1 RX size Station No 120 RX offset Station No 120 RX size mr Station No 1 RY offset Station No 1 RY size Station No 120 RY offset Station No 120 RY size mr Read Read Pe Page 266 Appendix 2 1 Page 269 Appendix 2 2 Page 269 Appendix 2 3 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address oe Initial Decimal Read write Refer to value Hexadecimal ae Station No 1 RWw offset 4E0044 ation No w offse ee Station No 1 RWw si 4E01 ation No w size a Page 270 to RWw offset size information Read Appendix 2 4 puns Station No 120 RWw offset 4EEE ation No w offse ce Station No 120 RWw si 4EEF ation No w size 20208 to 20223 Sa 4EF0 to 4EFF eee ee Station No 1 RWr offset 4F00 ation No r offse a Station No 1 RWr si 4F01 ation No r size ae Page 270 to RWr offset size information Read Appendix 2 5 ee Station No 120 RWr offset 4FEE ation No r offse ee Station No 120 RWr si 4FER ation No r size 20464 to 20511 iss 4F FO to 501F aa 20512 ESE 5020 anufacturer code z o1 20513 Model type 1 ol 50214 Own station network card bee Page 271 o 20514 information Appendix 2 6 w 5022 Model code 6 or 7 T lt 20515 TER gt S 50234 ersion 5 lt 20516 to 20519 an a 50244 to 50274 Doe EER
7. CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Item Description Actual system configuration Star and line mixed Connection to PORT1 Switching hub Master station GX Developer safety station Station No 0 mm fu f Ahaz Local station l f 5 safety station safety station nee Station No 3 Station No 4 Local station i Local station safety station J safety station L Station No 1 Station No 2 Network configuration window display Network configuration window display window display Connected Station pales Divergence Local station safety station Station No 5 Local station LocalS afety 3 Network Network configuration j i Status display area Zz LocalS afety 2 Actual system configuration Ring topology GX Developer _ Local station safety station Station No 2 _ Local station safety station Station No 1 Network configuration window display Connected Station MasterSafety 0 LocalSafety 1 LocalS afety 2 PI E E _ Master station P2 MOpUIM onsoubeq 6 133 Network Status 134 Item Description However in the following cases network configuration displayed in the netw
8. PORT1 error frame reception status own station PORT2 error frame reception status own station PORT1 error frame detection own station PORT2 error frame detection own station Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Turns on when Reserved station specification enable request accept status SBOO5E is turned on and the reserved station specification enable processing is completed OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion Stores the constant link scan status OFF Constant link scan is disabled ON Constant link scan is enabled Condition e This is enabled when Data link status own station SBO049 is off Stores loopback execution status The loopback station numbers can be checked by Loopback station number 1 SW0070 and Loopback station number 2 SW0071 OFF Normal no loopback stations ON Error loopback being performed Loopback stations exist Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off and Loopback function setting status SB0078 is on Stores the linkup status of PORT1 own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup starts after power on or Ethernet cable connection may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time Stores the linkup status of PORT2
9. TITTI i Im Parameter status ene Mode p ee Address za o 2 a w PT System monitor Online module change Intelli Intelli Intelli Intelli p ti QS001CPU gent gent gent gent Diagnostics 32pt 32pt 32pt 32pt Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Status ml Module system error a Module error E Module warning Detailed inf of power supply O Module change Stop monitor Close 2 Select the module in which an error has occurred System Monitor Installed status Base carer e When a module other than the master local module is Main base selected K gt Page 237 Section 12 2 1 a e When the selected module is the master local module K gt Page 238 Section 12 2 1 b QS001CPU ALA m mimimimimimimi Parameter status Mode Address System monitor C Intelli Intelli Intelli Intelli A 3 rsu QSOOICPU gent gent gent gent Diagnostics pply 32pt 32pt 32pt 32pt Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Status H Module system error g Module error i Detailed inf of power supply E Module change Stop monitor Te Point If data link cannot be performed even though no error is indicated in the System Monitor window select the master local module and click the Diagnostics button Page 238 Section 12 2 1 b 236 CHAPTER
10. 1 Createa project using GX Worksz2 Select QCPU Q mode in PLC Series and Q10UDH in PLC Type TZ Project gt New New Project Project Type Simple Project Cancel Use Label PLO Series ocru i mode PLL Type Q10UDH Language Ladder 2 Display the network parameter window and set parameters as follows W Project window lt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration AAR J Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window Network Type CC IE Field Master Station Start I O No 0000 l e Total Stations ee Onine Normal Mode FA T sBuljes uone s puepuels uonels J JSeN ZZL p sn ase uolels psepuels e pue suoiejs AjoJeS u ym Jo jdwexg UuoledluNnWWOD Z Online Normal Mode Network Configuration or e ae E SS N a en a 213 3 Display the network configuration setting window and set parameters as follows W Project window lt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET 2 gt Network Configuration Setting button Network Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration Settings Module No 1 Set up Network configuration Assignment Method i Points Start i Start End E No meer No Station a ie a ee ea Ge Master Station eel ce O TG pe zjiocal
11. 2 304 is stored in Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 Details on the causes of error can be checked by link special relay SB and link special register SW corresponding to the station number where the error has occurred SB0047 Baton pass status own station SW0048 Cause of baton pass interruption MS Je siBey jeloeds Yul pue gs Aejey jeloeds yurq Bust E L 22 5 Checking loopback execution status Whether loopback is being performed or not can be checked through link special relay SB and link special registers SW lt s Page 124 CHAPTER 9 1 While loopback is performed Loopback status SB0065 is on 2 Loopback station numbers are stored to Loopback station number SW0070 and SW0071 SB0065 Loopback status SW0070 Loopback station number 1 SW0071 Loopback station number 2 Ex Loopback when a cable is disconnected between station No 2 and stations No 3 Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 SW0070 and SW0071 store 2 and 3 respectively If the master station is powered on before slave stations data link may be reconfigured During the reconfiguration maximum 13 seconds an error is detected using SBOOBO Starting up the master station last can prevent data link from being reconfigured 6 Checking communication error and network event history Communication errors and network events are detected by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be detect
12. GPREAD f 4 in the ladder mode Setting data O shows the devices applicable to the instruction Setting side User Device value is set by the user System Device value is set by the CPU module Descriptions of setting data and data type Data type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access 16 bit binary Start I O number of the master local module of the own station 00 to 3E Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in 3 digits Start device of the own station where control data is stored CLF Page 160 Section 10 4 1 a Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored C7 Page 162 Section 10 4 1 b Device name Start device of the own station where read data is stored A continuous area for the read data length is required s7 Page 162 Section 10 4 1 ge ection 1 c System Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails ajonuoo ajqewwesGosd S uones JeyjouYy Woy ejeg Bulpesy GYAN dO df t O 158 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Instruction execution conditions include the following types Any time Duringon On the rising edge During off On the falling edge eme n e oar a e The following types of devices are used for the dedicated instructions on CC Link IE Field Netw
13. L gt Page 152 CHAPTER 10 Ex With a dedicated instruction READ accessing a programmable controller of another station Safety CPU module Master station Local station Safety CPU module safety station Command HH READ H Device Point To batch set clocks of all stations or each group of stations on CC Link IE Field Network use the REQ instruction Page 194 Section 10 8 117 UOISSIWSUBI JUSISUBI Q YIOMJOU WELS y UIUJIM UOHedIUNWWOD L E 8 3 2 Communication with different networks By setting the routing parameters communication path using GX Developer in advance transient transmission can be performed to stations on different networks through dedicated instructions or GX Developer Seamless communication is available with the following networks lt gt Page 92 Section 7 7 e Ethernet e CC Link IE Controller Network e MELSECNET H e MELSECNET 10 e CC Link when using GX Developer CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 1 Set the communication route by routing parameters in advance E Network parameters Setting the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET ro Target Rela Relay network Ho network Mo station Mo tal a E E LSS SSS SSS Relay station Network No 2 CC Link IE Field Network Point Communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart number of relay stations 7 Page 154
14. SOINPO E207 9SEN Z 25 b Checking CC Link IE Field Network status graphically CC Link IE Field Network status can be checked using GX Developer Error locations error causes and event history are displayed on the window This allows the system to quickly recover from errors lt gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 Displays error details Error details Selected station No 1 Detailed Information Total Number of Received Data on PORT side 49123421 Total Number of Received Data on PORT2 side 0 Own Station Connecting Status Normal Communicating on PORT side Cable Disconnected on PORT2 side Reason for Transmission Interruption None Reason for Data Link Stop Stop Instruction Present Error Factor A data link stop instruction was issued by the host station or received from the master station If it is a head module 580001 used in the system is ON by mistake CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Select i Module Module 1 Network No 1 Station Station No 1 Error Network Status H S obabSlaweestablans 3 Total GlaveSbations 2 Current Link 1 The Number of Troubleshooting Set In Parameter Connected N Scan Time MS Stations Error Occurs Restart the data link in the host station or restart the data link From the master station IF Connected Station itis a head module reset the module MasterSafety 0 Divergence E o Displays the statu
15. Stores the scan mode setting status OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode Stores the operating status during a CPU stop error due to parameters OFF Stop ON Continue Stores the reserved station specification status due to parameters The reserved station number can be checked using Reserved station setting status SW00C0 to SW00C7 OFF Not specified ON Specified Stores the Error invalid station setting status due to parameters The station No set for the error invalid station can be checked by Error invalid station setting SWOODO to SW00D7 OFF Not specified ON Specified Stores the parameter reception status from the master station OFF Reception completed ON Reception not completed Stores the setting status of the loopback function configured by the parameter OFF Not used ON Used Stores the network event history occurrence OFF No event history ON Event history found If the event history is found the cumulative number of network event history can be checked by the Event count SWO007A Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Event count SWO007A may be offset by one sequence scan This area is cleared when Event count clear SBOOOQ is turned on Stores the own station s setting status for Data Link Disorder Station Setting OFF OFF or cleared to 0 ON Hold Stores the own station s setting status for Output Setting during CPU STOP OFF Hold ON Clear
16. Transient transmission communication is available with other networks as well as the same network Communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart number of relay stations 7 lt _ gt Page 154 Section 10 1 1 b 99 5 2 Network Components CC Link IE Field Network consists of components such as cables and hubs 5 2 1 Cables For wiring use the 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Caimacry Seorhighsr The following conditioning cables D i a ede Straiaht cable RJ45 connector e IEEE802 3 1000BASE T ouble s g ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e Point For CC Link IE Field Network wiring use the recommended wiring components by CC Link Partner Association Cables for CC Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC Link IE Field Network 1 Product Cables for CC Link IE Field Network are available from Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Catalogs for cable are also available Also the connector processing of cable length is available for your preference Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Type CC Link IE Field Network cable Cable types The following cable types are available depending on the operating environment e Standard type Cables for inside the control panel and indoor connection e L type Cables for outdoor connection Cables and relay adapters of flame retardant or waterproof type are also available Please c
17. CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur on CC Link IE Field Network causes of the errors and corrective actions 12 1 Before Troubleshooting Check that the POWER LED of the safety power supply module and the ALIVE LED of the safety CPU module are on If either or both are off troubleshoot the safety CPU module QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 12 2 Troubleshooting Procedure The procedure for identifying the cause of the problem and taking action is explained below Use a programming tool supported by the programmable controller used GX Developer for safety programmable controllers and GX Works2 for standard programmable controllers If a slave station cannot be monitored due to cable disconnection or any other error directly connect the programming tool to the slave station Bunooyssjqnou sojeg Z 235 1 Procedure The following describes a procedure for identifying the cause of an error and the action when the master station is a safety programmable controller When the master station is a standard programmable controller refer to the following User s manual for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module used 1 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module System Monitor Installed status Base Base Modde and open the System Monitor window Main base faves DO Diagnostics gt System monitor
18. KO K4 KO K10 K20 K30 K40 K5 D300 D220 D222 D223 D224 D225 D226 D228 D229 D230 D750 D751 D752 D753 D227 M115 Control data setting for WRITE instruction Stores write data in D750 to D753 Execution of WRITE instruction CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 7 JP GP SWRITE Writing Data to the Programmable Controller on Another Station This instruction writes data to the device of the programmable controller on another station In units of words With the SWRITE instruction the device of the other station is turned on when data writing is completed Data writing with the SREAD instruction can be confirmed by this Start contact JPSWRITE f GP SWRITE sie Start contact Setting data cope Others ee 61 ee eee S2 ee eee 01 o o S ees 7 02 po 03 O o O 4 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used When specifying SD SW it can be written in the range that the user can set For details on SD SW refer to the following Manuals for the CPU module and network module of the target station 2 For the SWRITE instruction the write notification device D3 can be omitted in the programming However the operation is the same as the WRITE instruction The SWRITE instruction can operate differently depending on whether the write notification device D3 is omitted or not 3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU the data s
19. MITSUBISHI ae ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Safety Programmable Controller MELSEC LEY eres MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual QS0J71GF11 T2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION NWARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions ZNNARNING resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions NCAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING When a safety programmable controller detects an error in an external power supply or a failure in programmable control
20. Mode Offline Mode H W test Self loopback test Loop test Description This mode performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission without losing their inherent speed performance This mode is suitable for a system that performs I O control and analog control and transmits large amount of data for management monitoring and diagnostics by transient transmission Use this mode for general applications This mode preferentially performs cyclic transmission for high speed communications Note that the maximum number of points assigned to RWw RWr is 256 points per local station In this mode the processing speed of transient transmission is slower than in Online Normal Mode Select this mode to disconnect the master local module from the network for stopping data link with other stations Select this mode to perform a hardware test lt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 Select this mode to perform a self loopback test lt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 Select this mode to perform a loop test lt Page 67 Section 6 4 1 Select a local station mode Mode Online Offline H W test Self loopback test 2 Setting example Description Select this mode to connect the master local module to the network for performing data link with other stations Select this mode to disconnect the master local module from the network for stopping data link with other stations Select this mode to perfo
21. Network No 1 Station No 1 etwork No Station No Cable Test button Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port 3 Enter a station number and click the button to operate the test If an error occurs take PORT1 PORTZ Test Result Test Result P C Exams corrective actions according to the error Error Factor Error Factor m e S S ag e Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected Close 14 6 4 3 Communication test CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Communication test checks if transient transmission data can be properly routed from the own station to the communication target Take the following system configuration as an example of communication test procedure CC Link IE Field Network e e e ss SS 1 I Own station request source Station No 1 se SB SB SBS Ss Ss ep Station S a No 1 se e e e emmm m CC Link IE Field Network Station No 4 Communication target Ae h a a a a a a a a a a e e e e e e e e e E CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE CAP eVelopet CC Link IE Field Network Field Network po ES eee x pe a ee ey
22. Reserved Station Reserved Station No Setting 15 Station That Does Not Exist Function Disable Not Selectable Not Selectable Ca n cel th e res e rvati Oo n Operation Method 1 Select the station to disable reserved station function or to enable reserved station Functionl by clicking Reserved Station Function Disable Reserved Station 7 De b u g th e S lave stat I Oo n th at h a S bee n a d d e d Function Enable 2 Contents that are selected in direction 1 will be reflected when pressing End Setting button 15 Reserved Station Es Station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function e1 nnnng ing i Cancel Point Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of reserved station specification Resetting the master station safety station or powering off the system Temporary cancellation of reserved station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the network parameter of the master station safety station Disconnecting a station for which reservation has been temporarily cancelled If the safety CPU module on the master station safety station is reset or the system is powered off the master station safety station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Reserved station setting status SWOOCO to SW00C7 and Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 The difference can be corr
23. Section 10 1 1 b To batch set clocks of all stations on CC Link IE Field Network use the REQ instruction lt gt Page 194 Section 10 8 118 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 4 Reserved station specification and reserved station function disable Reserved station specification allows setting of a station that is not actually connected at present but will be connected to the network in the future must be included in the total number of stations for the network Reserved stations are not detected as faulty stations even though they are not actually connected When the reserved station function is disabled a slave station specified as a reserved station can be canceled temporarily without changing the GX Developer setting 1 Reserved station specification A slave station can be specified as a reserved station in the Network Configuration Setting gt Page 81 Section 7 3 Not actually connected Master station Slave station Slave station Slave station safety station Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 0 Reserved station Network Configuration Setting Set up Network configuration Assignment Method A y 9 The column contents for refresh device will be changed corresponding to refresh parameter setting contents C Points Start Please reopen the window after completing refresh parameter setting when changing refresh parameter Start End Number of PLCs St
24. When a station where an error has occurred is selected Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Mode Online Normal Mode 2 1 When a station with no station No setting is selected Selected Station Communication Status Monitor MAC Address He WHes Fi 3 Module Error Station No Setting 5 PORT2 Communication Error 6 7 Displays operating status Station Mo 1 Mo Error Normal Station No 1 Enor Error Data link is continued yellow StationNo 1 Ener Error Data link is stopped red Displays a mode 2 3 Displays a MAC address Sets a station number for a slave station to which a station number has not been set Salactad Station Cammilnication This button is displayed only when a slave station meeting the following conditions Status Monitor has been selected in Network Status e The slave station supports station number setting from the master station safety station A station number has not been set to the slave station When a station set in Network Configuration Setting is added the external device on a slave station outputs data input from the master station safety station simultaneously with configuration of the station number setting Therefore set the safety CPU module to STOP or check that outputs from the external device will not cause a problem beforehand Click this button to check error details Take cor
25. e If an Ethernet cable is disconnected loopback cannot be detected e If a station is disconnected due to failure or power off data link will stop Therefore do not use a switching hub to configure the ring topology X Switching hub e Offline mode station in ring topology In the following cases the master station or the station connected to the offline mode station cannot detect loopback e One of the Ethernet cables connected to the offline mode station is disconnected Master station safety station Station in Offline mode No loopback is detected No loopback is detected e A station connected to the offline mode station is disconnected Master station safety station Station in Offline mode No loopback is detected No loopback is detected To detect loopback set the offline mode station as a reserved station When the offline mode station is disconnected loopback can be detected Point A station during the RESET status and a station with no station number setting operate as an offline mode station does 52 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION f Connecting disconnecting a cable and powering off on a device When the operations listed below are performed all stations on the network may be reconnected At that time a data link error or a baton pass error may momentarily occur in all the stations and outputs of the connected slave stations may turn off Network configuration Operation e Powering
26. n aaa anaana aaeeea eee eee 90 T R ting Paramete Ss con 2 vin et wo Vie 2h de aa elas doe eaa ee ae e 92 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 96 8 1 Safety Communication Function 0 0 00 0000 ee eee eee 96 8 1 1 Communication with safety stations 0 0 0 0 0c tenes 96 8 1 2 Error log registration TUNnClOn Sai 44 chee hes ated GERM e eek fates esi ahetnes 99 8 1 3 Safety station interlock function 0 0 0 0 cc eet n eee 100 8 2 Cyclic Transmission Dss hia satay we aed ee oot a ae a ahead eee ae aeons twee blobs 102 8 2 1 Data flow and link device assignment 0 0 00 cece eens 103 G22 INK TEMES rts erat ceen bee Ge alee hee Wome eee On ee boas 104 8 2 3 Assurance of cyclic data integrity 0 0 eee eee eens 106 8 2 4 Scan synchronization specification 0 0 00 cc teen eee 112 8 2 5 Input status setting in case of failure 2 teens 113 8 2 6 Output status setting for CPU module STOP 0 0 0 0 cc cee eee eee 115 8 2 7 Cyclic transmission stop and restart 0 0 0 een eee 116 8 3 Transient Transmission tie ose SS can bo oo dete eae tps ocean etn nauk sie east 117 8 3 1 Communication within the same network 000 0 cc cee ene 117 8 3 2 Communication with different networks 0 0 0 0 ccc cece ee 118 8 4 Reserved station specification and reserved station function disable 119 8 5 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function
27. scan time error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure l l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RWw setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the offset of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RWw setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RWr setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error
28. 1 Clicking the 4ssignment image button in the Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards window will open the assignment image window C gt Page 79 Section 7 2 2 Select a device to be displayed and the magnification ratio in the window and check the image of refresh parameter assignment E Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards Module 3 CCIE Field Master station Safety None 4 Network type Starting 1 0 No Network No 1 Total stations 3 Station No Online Normal Mode Network Configuration Setting Network Operation Setting Refresh parameters Specify station No by parameter w Safety Communication Setting Necessary setting No setting Alreadyset Setif itis needed No settings Already set Start I O No Please input the starting 44D New ofmilac medule in HEX 16 bit form 1 Click Be Assignment image D 2 Set V Device PLC side Device Link side and E Network parameter CC IE MELSECNET refresh parameters assignment image SE a Display magnification p DevicefPLC side X z DeviceLink side EEE osae 11 Close z 7 safety data transfer device receive Module 1 000000 0s001 CC IE Field 0000 000800 3 The assignment image is displayed 001000 0017F0 3 Ared part in the CPU side device indicates that the device in the red
29. 1 Specify the station number to cancel a temporary error invalid station in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 2 Turn on Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept status SB005A is turned on A When the cancellation is completed Temporary error invalid setting cancel completion status SB005B turns on 5 Use Temporary error invalid station setting SW00E0 to SW00E7 to check whether the temporary error invalid station is cancelled When the network no longer has a temporary error invalid station Temporary error invalid station status SB00E0 is turned off 6 When the temporary error invalid station is cancelled with error an error code will be stored in Temporary error invalid station setting cancel result SW0055 7 Turn off Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 SWOOE SW0010 to Reserved station function disable temporary error SB0011 Temporary error invalid setting cancel request i pe SW0017 invalid station setting Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept SBO05A Wai a i i SW0055 Temporary error invalid station setting cancel result Temporary error invalid settin leti SB005B porary g cancel completion status SWOOEO to l SBOOEO Temporary error invalid station status Temporary error invalid station setting 234 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING
30. 10210310 e0 98 e smoor l le l lE lE E haololvebrtbel sla Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Number SWOOBO to SWO00B7 SWOOCO to SWO00C7 Data link status each station Reserved station setting status Description Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station 0 Cyclic transmission normal station 1 Cyclic transmission faulty station e If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Cyclic transmission normal station may vary by several seconds e If no response is received for several link scans the station is determined to be a cyclic transmission faulty station b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swoosofis jis pahis heno ls 7 s s 14131217 SWO00B1 SW00B2 48 Swo0B3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 swoo84 0 76 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 60 66 67 66 65 Swo0Bs 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 SWO00B6 101 100 99 98 97 swooB 20 1 19 1 18 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabl
31. 120 8 6 JOO pbeck FUNCION 2 0540 cee botnet tbat deen tas aa a ea Bee ee 121 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 124 GA IDIAGMOSNG ets of tO 2 oan toe get Cow Coes at etna Goes aes eee eee 124 92 Staring Diagnosis aie iire eta dae Bree ete nee ee eee See ee Ea eae ea mene 127 9 3 Diagnostic WindOW 0 30 ci0i4 25Jiobi ei iee ea ee eee ee oR eee oh ee 130 g4 WMI SUA SOc aca ce cece tee te ata ate ea Sore ene ete chee ean we aes went he amen s oat 138 9 5 Network Event HIStOLy osise 6 oe caves Bora i datas ace Oe Otel ood 140 9 6 Canceling Restoring Reserved Station Setting 0 0 0 cee eee 142 9 7 Setting Canceling Temporary Error Invalid Station 0 0 0000 c eee eee eee 146 98 Remote Opela acre Feta neea ea aly o Se Sites Minha is o et Minha oe Bees 151 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 152 10 1 List of Dedicated Instructions 0 0 0 0 anaana aaaea ee een eee eee 152 10 2 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 0 cc eens 155 10 2 1 Precautions for link dedicated instructions 000 cee ce eee eee eee ees 155 12 10 3 Understanding the Documentation on Dedicated Instructions 5 10 4 JP GP READ Reading Data from the Programmable Controller on Another Station 10 5 JP GP SREAD Reading Data from the Programmable Controller on Another Station 10 6 JP GP WRITE Writing Data to the Programmable Controller on Another Station 10
32. 301 Appendix 5 Processing Time This chapter describes the processing time of CC Link IE Field Network Appendix 5 1 Link refresh time The following are formulas to calculate the link refresh time 1 Safety communication asTR KM1 KM2 x n ms asTR Link refresh time of safety communication n Link refresh time of the receiving side of safety communication KM1 KM2 Constant KM1 2 80 KM2 0 20 2 Standard communication aT aR KM3 KM4 x RACY SB RWr RWw sw ims 16 aT Link refresh time of the sending side of standard communication aR Link refresh time of the receiving side of standard communication RX Total number of RX points that are actually being link refreshed 7 RY Total number of RY points that are actually being link refreshed k RWr Total number of RWr points that are actually being link refreshed a RWw Total number of RWw points that are actually being link refreshed 1 SB Number of SB points SW Number of SW points KM3 KM4 Constant KM3 0 09 KM4 0 41 x 103 4 Total number of link device points for the range set by the refresh parameters and set in the network configuration setting Note that the points assigned to reserved stations are excluded 2 This value is for standard communication between safety CPU modules 302 APPENDICES Appendix 5 2 Link scan time The following is the formula to calculate the link scan time when the link scan mode is asynchronous LS Np Number
33. C o ama sel gt D D N a D gt O O D 3 O Q D N O O D n pme D O 5 Hardware test Check the internal hardware of the master local module Page 60 Section 6 2 1 Individual unit i Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the diagnostics Self loopback test Page 62 Section 6 2 2 master local module Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of Own network Loop test l Page 67 Section 6 4 1 l l each station diagnostics Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 74 Section 6 4 2 Other network Se at Check whether the communication path for transient transmission Communication test ae Page 75 Section 6 4 3 diagnostics from the own station to the target station is correct 39 gt w E 5 O a O 5 O s 3 4 List of I O Signals This section lists I O signals for the safety CPU module The I O signal assignment of when the start I O number of the master local module is 0000 the module is mounted to the O slot of the safety main base unit is shown below The device X is an input signal from the master local module to the safety CPU module The device Y is an output signal from the safety CPU module to the master local module Signal direction Master local module gt Safety CPU Signal direction Safety CPU module Master local module module Device number Device number Signal name x x
34. Channel 2 Write to station No 2 WRITE SUONONJISU P9 EDIPSp Yul 10 SUOIINEDAd Z OL Station No 2 Other station 155 4 Executing link dedicated instructions to AnUCPU stations a Executing an instruction to AnUCPU stations Never execute a master local module dedicated instruction to ANUCPU stations Doing so will cause MAIN CPU DOWN or WDT ERROR and may result in an operation stop in the AnUCPU b Executing an instruction to all stations on a network that contains an AnUCPU station Use the group specification to exclude the AnNUCPU 5 Executing link dedicated instructions to group specified or all specified stations in a multiple CPU system The instruction can be executed to only the control CPUs of the stations Specify 00004 or O3FF for the target station s CPU type S1 3 of the instruction a Executing an instruction to all the specified stations Configure the system so that the target stations have the same control CPU No 000000 000000 000000 EN 2 EE 2 2 lt Control CPU setting Z amp Q S Set the same control CPU No 156 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Specifying a CPU by the target station s CPU type If the CPU No set for
35. LS Link scan time n2 LS SM Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer Rio Intelligent device station processing time Manual for the intelligent device station used 305 w Bulissedojg G xipueddy w Aejap uoiss wsue d10AD E G xipueddy b Master station and local stations e Master station RX lt Local station RY The table below shows formulas to calculate time from when a device in the CPU module of the local station turns on or off until that of the master station turns on or off When m 1 Calculation Block data assurance per station No block data assurance per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x 1 LS x k SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 Maximum SM x 1 LS x k n1 value SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x k SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x k SL x 1 When m 2 to 4 Calculation Block data assurance per station No block data assurance per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode SM x 1 LS x m x k Normal value ne SMx1 LSxm SLxn SMx1 LSxm SLxn SMx1 LS xm SL xn Maximum SM x 1 LS xm x k n1 SMx1 LS x m x 2 SM x 1 LS x n1 1 SM x 1 LS x m x 2 value SL x n 1 SL x n 1 SL x 2 SL x 2 SM Seq
36. MK The contents of DO to D3 are transferred to WO to W3 Upon completion of storage in WO to W3 BO at the sending station for a handshake is turned on 110 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Cyclic transmission sends signals starting from RWw0 following by signals starting from RWwFEO and B600 at the receiving station is turned on The contents of W600 to W603 are stored in DO to D3 Upon completion of storage in DO to D3 BO at the receiving station for a handshake is turned on When the data are sent to the receiving station BO at the sending station is turned off When B600 at the receiving station turns off BO at the receiving station is turned off 111 AysBejul eyep o10A0 Jo BOUeINSSY Zg uoIssilusuel DOAD Zg 8 2 4 Scan synchronization specification 112 Whether to synchronize the link scan with the safety CPU module s sequence scan or not can be selected 1 Difference between asynchronous and synchronous settings a Asynchronous setting Link scan is performed asynchronously with the sequence scan of the safety CPU module Select this item to shorten input transmission delay time when sequence scan takes much time than link scan Note that output transmission delay time will become longer b Synchronous setting Link scan is performed synchronously with the sequence scan of the safety CPU module Select this item in the following cases e To shorten output transmission delay time Note that when sequence
37. Mode 2 Serie ats oes Sete a ae te ete 80 MODE PED darin cache ds aoa ase ace aes 30 Module failure XO 000000 0s 40 264 Module ready XF 00000 eens 40 265 Module replacement 0000000e 58 WIS PED raran aa amp amp aterm a aoe 30 Multi network system 0 0000 eae 99 Network components anaa aaa aa aaa 56 Network configuration setting 81 Network event history 0500 140 Network module 00000 ee eee eee 15 NETWORK INO ie dink seen beacae oe ark sete er eee 263 Network No 0 cee ee ee 19 Network operation setting 20 85 Network setting 2 000000 0c eee eee 19 Network statuS 0 0 00 00000 cee eee eee 131 Non periodic communication transient transmission ais dd fine hate nc ls toch tet a pect ST ths ag 20 Number of connectable stations per network 33 313 Number of modules 000008 58 Number of safety inputs outputs per safety connection E aig Mees oath EEEE N E RE ieee te 33 OS eo aa a ee ca ea A 262 Offline high speed mode 2000 80 ONEING aeaa aceite aw ee hea wae bee ae 262 Online normal mode 0000 00a 80 Open Method 00000 eee 91 326 Other station controller information station No 1 e hak Gone don Maeda aka cigar eS eae oe cain ata 44 Other station network card information station No 1 E a acta Sorat Seta E A o AN eat 44 O
38. Page 124 CHAPTER 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action gt Page 246 Section 12 5 UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 191 01 U00 jqewweboId 94 O geq Hu FLIMM dD d 9 04 183 184 4 Program example The following program is for writing data of D750 to D753 of station No 2 own station into D300 to D303 of station No 3 target station when M112 is turned on a System configuration example Station No 0 Station No 2 CPU module Network module Safety CPU Master local module module WRITE Safety CPU Master local request source module module Own station Channel 2 i Network module request target Target station Station No 1 Station No 3 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Baton pass status each station of station No SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWOOAO0 2 3 Remark Eo ooo ooo ooo ooo coco ocr oer For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the following L Page 273 Appendix 3 Page 286 Appendix 4 e Devices used by the user Device Description Device Description D220 to D237 D750 to l l Write data storage device statio
39. System Monitor window Click the master local module Click the Diagnostics button System Monitor Installed status Base Mt J 2 fs aes CEEE A hy TT a a Zee lt amp O amp E E E E E E E E E E E E E E sonsoubeiq Bues 76 Parameter status Mode PO Address 0 20 40 60 System monito es O 1 2 3 eom BERBReEeReEBeREBeereeatainat f Q rsu QSOO1CPU Diagnostics pply Sup EB BB BBP eee E Module s Detailed Information ES a Se ee a Base Information Product Inf List Status E Module system error fA Module error m Module warning Detailed inf of power supply E Module change Stop monitor Close 127 3 Select the station to be diagnosed from Select Station or Network Status e A or isdisplayed on the module icon of the station where an error occurs The module icon of a disconnected station is displayed in monochrome WE e is displayed on the icon of a cable where a communication error occurs To check the details of the communication error click the neighboring stations of 9 e is displayed if the network is configured in ring topology although the loopback function is disabled is displayed if the network is configured in star topology although the loopback function is enabled is displayed if the network is incorrectly configured in ring topology CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Module Mo
40. The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network No The station number of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in station number S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated system instruction is normally completed Master station 125 7Dy Local station intelligent device station 1 to 120 4 If Completion status S1 1 is Channel in use dedicated instruction error codes D25A and D25B data is not stored CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored If the device setting in PLC Parameter is different between the own and target stations use S2 with double quotation marks to specify c Start device of the own station where read data is stored Specify the own station s start device D1 within the available range so that the read data can be stored lex When the area addressed D150 or higher of the own station CPU is already used Correct Incorrect D50 is specified in D1 x D100 is specified in D1 Own station CPU Other station CPU Own station CPU Other station CPU eo DO Pa DO D50 f 100 words Fi 100 words ie D99 D100 xe D99 D149 D150 D150 rod D199 Data to be read with READ instruction
41. Turns on when a cyclic transmission start request by Link start own station SB0000 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0000 is off ON Start accepted SB0000 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when Link start request accept status own station SBO050 turns on and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SB0000 is off ON Start completed SB0000 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when a cyclic transmission stop request by Link stop own station SBO001 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0001 is off ON Stop accepted SB0001 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when Link stop request accept status own station SB0052 turns on and cyclic transmission stop is completed OFF Stop not completed SB0001 is off ON Stop completed SB0001 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when a cyclic transmission start request by System link start SBO002 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0002 is off ON Start accepted SB0002 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Availability Master station safety station Local station APPENDICES Availability Master Number
42. __ Area already used by own station s CPU mii Duplicated area 2 Function a READ instruction overview The instruction reads data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the target station start device S2 into the own station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the reading from devices of the target station is completed the completion device D2 turns on Own station Target station Safety CPU module Master local module CPU module Network module D1 S2 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following gt Page 152 Section 10 1 1 UOHE S JOYJOUY UO Ja O JUOD sjqewwesbos4 94 Woy eyeq Bulpeey GVAN d9 de v OL 163 c Checking the execution status of the READ instruction The execution status completion or error of the READ instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the READ instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the READ instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the READ instruction fails d READ instruction execution
43. l Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 ENDF7 0 END I l l i i i ON I I l l l i Start contact OFF i OFF l I l I l l Completion device ON Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF OFF l I l Completion status ION i indication device l Device of D2 1 OFF OFF I I iscan_ i Completion status i Tuu PK Error code IA I EE SE PEE EE sce te cats las Sateen r ee ee ae a Soa a ee a m ey a o ee ee n a a aa m ee ee o aa a eee aa eee a ee e l l l l l l Master local module i l Channel 1 l l Target station error 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Developer Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics lt s Page 124 CHAPTER 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D1 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action lt gt Page 246 Section 12 5 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Program example Reading clock data The following program is for reading clock data of the safety CPU module of the station No 2 target station to the station No 0 own station when M131 is turned on a System configuration example Station No 0 Station No 2 REQ Safety CPU CPU module Network
44. lt Page 309 Appendix 5 5 Set a CPU module device where safety data are stored Receive Data Storage Device e Device Name X M B D W Device Name Points Start End e Points v Device Range Bit devices 16 to 128 SECENE i Word devices 1to8 Data Safety data Storage reception e Start Device range of the Device End safety CPU module Default Blank Set bit devices in units of 16 points and word devices in units ner of 1 points Safety CPU module Safety CPU module Safety Data own station communication target station Transfer Device Setting Set a CPU module device from where safety data are sent e Device Name Y M B T C Send Data Storage Device uias uonediunWWoy Ajajes 92 Device Name Points Stat End ST D W gt Target Station SPONE y i Device Range Daa Bit devices 16 to 128 Send Data evice i Safety data Word devices 1to8 Storage transmission r Device e Start Device range of the aaa End safety CPU module Default Blank Set bit devices in units of 16 points and word devices in units F l Safety CPU module Safety CPU module of 1 points own station communication target station Batch set Safety Refresh Monitoring Time _ Page 309 Safety Refresh Monitoring Time Batch Setting Appendix 5 5 button Enter the time in the area right to the Safety Refresh Monitoring Time Batch Setting 2 t
45. safety station Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Noda inkerorwiibhedetectedon tion No Station No 0 Srealelicksciieae this station even in the case of Network Configuration Setting an error or power OFF Set up Network configuration a lath ot The column contents for refresh device will be changed corresponding to refresh parameter setting contents C Points Start Please reopen the window after completing refresh parameter setting when changing refresh parameter Start End eae of PLCs as No Station Type qe 4S ee Reserved Error Invalid Station Pe Suen far l ol oere a aes a ecaro z E EE RS ie ieee pet veg Me Setting om mm Po fLocalStation 25 01200 o F 256 0200 o2FF xi200 256 vi200 256 wrooese w2o0256 Invalid Station gt m e e e E E E Select Invalid Station 2 Temporary error invalid station This function is useful for various operations such as replacing a slave station during data link by temporarily setting it as an error invalid station For details refer to gt Page 146 Section 9 7 Point This cannot be performed when the safety CPU operation mode is on the safety mode When the local station safety station is set as an error invalid station or a temporary error invalid station also if the local station safety station gets disconnected safety communication with the disconnected station fails 120 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS
46. 1 network No 1 to reach network No 3 Relay Target Relay station network No network No Target Relay station network No network No Goes through station No 1 of F network No 2 to reach network No 1 o Automatically passes data to No 4 the relay station Request source Station No 3 Relay pai station 1 Goes through station No 4 of network No 2 to reach network No 3 Passes data to the request target euy No 4 on network No 3 Fea 2 Station Station station 2 siojoweseg Buynoy 7 2 Request target Setting for request target Setting for relay station 2 E Network parameters Setting the Ethernet CC IE MEL E Network parameters Setting the Ethernet CC IE MEL Target Relay Relay Target Relay Relay network Ho network Ho station No network Ho f network Mo staton MHo 95 CHAPTER 8 FuNcTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the master local module 8 1 Safety Communication Function This section explains functions related to safety communication 8 1 1 Communication with safety stations One on one safety communication is available periodically between safety stations on the same network The following devices are used for data communication X Y M B D W T ST and C 96 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Safety communication flow After a safety connection is established safety data is sent periodically from safety sta
47. 1 Station No 3 Station No 2 c Cascade connection Up to 20 layer connection is available for the cascade connection Up to 20 layer cascade connection For wiring method refer to gt Page 64 Section 6 3 50 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Precautions a Connecting devices to the same network Do not connect Ethernet devices e g personal computer other than CC Link IE Field Network devices to the switching hub used by CC Link IE Field Network Doing so will cause timeout in the master station resulting in disconnection of all the stations b Configuration in which data link cannot be performed incorrectly configured ring topology Point Do not wire devices as shown below Doing so will cause an error in all stations and data link cannot be performed e Connecting both PORT1 and PORT2 to the switching hub Ex Cannot connect both Ethernet ports to the switching hub e Ring topology through a switching hub X Switching hub 51 Wa SAs YJOMJOU juIS V S UOHEINBYUOD YIOMJON PIO Fl AU IT OO V S c Ring topology To configure a ring topology select Use under Loopback Function Setting in the network parameter window for the master station gt Page 81 Section 7 3 d Using a switching hub to configure a ring topology If ring topology is configured by connecting two stations through two of the switching hub s ports the following problems may arise
48. 1 b Device name Start device of the own station where read data is stored D1 A continuous area for the read data length is required __ gt Page 169 Section 10 5 1 c Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of D2 the instruction System D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails Device of the target station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of D3 the instruction Data reading from another station can be confirmed a Control data The SREAD instruction control data is the same as that of the READ instruction C Page 160 Section 10 4 b Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored The target station s start device where data to be read by the SREAD instruction is stored is the same as that of the READ instruction 3 Page 160 Section 10 4 c Start device of the own station where read data is stored The start device of the own station where data read by the SREAD instruction is stored is the same as that of the READ instruction s Page 160 Section 10 4 169 UOHE S JOYJOUY UO Ja OJUOD Bj qewwWesboJ4 94 Woy eyeq Bulpeey GVSNS dO dr GOL 2 Function a SREAD instruction overview The instruction reads data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the target station start device S2 into the own station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4
49. 12 TROUBLESHOOTING a Checking for error in modules other than the master local module pen 1 Select a module other than the master local jagnostics module in the System Monitor window and PLC status PLC operation status PLC operation STOP switch RUN Safety CPU operation mode Test mode click the Diagnostics button The window Present Error Monitor run stop corresponding to the module will open In the MODULE L4YOUT ERROR 2010 12 22 9 29 20 illustration on the left the safety CPU module is op monitor Error Jump Help selected Operation errar log z Display filter fan log Occurrence order display Ascending Ta If the ___Diagnestics button IS not supported Type No Detail Operation enrormessage Year Mont _ Time l i Ope oP200 wate Te a erener LOG ane am 32 items by the module click the Module s Detailed Information POWER ON 2010 12 22 26 C Allitems MODULE LAYOUT ERROR 2010 12 22 26 POWER ON 2010 12 22 9 29 button MODULE LAYOUT ERROR 2010 12 22 Clear log File save 2 Identify the error location and take action Error Jum piai LI User s manual for the module used Help Close 3 If data link cannot be performed even after the above operation is performed perform the following e Checking for error using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics lt gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 e Checking the LEDs lt _ gt Page 239 Sect
50. 124 CHAPTER 9 a Checking the CPU module status other stations 7 Whether the CPU module is in RUN or STOP can be checked by the following link special relays SB and link special register SW e CPU RUN status master station SBOOF 1 e When CPU RUN status each station SBOOFO is turned on check the station number using CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO 2 A continuation error of the CPU module can be checked by the following link special relays SB and link special register SW e CPU operation status master station 2 SB0111 e When CPU operation status each station 2 SB0110 is turned on check the station number using Operation status each station 2 SW0110 3 A stop error of the CPU module can be checked by the following link special relays SB and link special register SW e CPU operation status master station 1 SB0101 e When CPU operation status each station 1 SB0100 is turned on check the station number using Operation status each station 1 SWO0100 SBOOFO CPU RUN status each station SB0100 Operation status each station 1 SB0101 CPU operation status eee a S SB0110 CPU operation status each station SW0110 Operation status each station 2 SB0111 CPU operation status master on b Checking safety CPU module status own station 1 Whether the safety CPU module is in RUN or STOP can be checked by CPU RUN status own station SB004C 2 Ifa continuatio
51. 3 n 20520 Controller information i 5028p valid invalid flag 20521 EEROR F 50294 anufacturer code 20522 doder 502A ARA R 20523 Own station controller eine Read riie Page 271 odel code i l 502Bp information Appendix 2 6 20524 Versi 502C ersion 20525 to 20534 aca i 502D to 50364 odel name string 20535 to 20536 Vendor specific device 50374 to 50384 information 43 Address Decimal Hexadecimal 20537 to 20538 50394 to 503Ap 20544 50404 20545 50414 20546 5042H 20547 5043H 20548 to 20551 50444 to 5047p 20552 50484 20553 50494 20554 504A 20555 504B 20556 504C 20557 to 20566 20567 to 20568 20569 to 20575 50594 to 505F 20576 to 24383 5060 to 5F3F 24384 to 31767 5F40 to 7FFFp 4 Initial Read write Refer to value System area Manufacturer code Model type uF Page 272 Appendix 2 7 Read Other station network card information station No 1 wede CAR Version System area Controller information valid invalid flag Manufacturer code Model type Page 272 Appendix 2 7 Model code A D o a Other station controller information station No 1 Version Model name string Vendor specific device information System area Other station information l Same as other station information station No 1 station No 2 to No 120 System area Since the versio
52. 7 JP GPSWRITE Writing Data to the Programmable Controller on Another Station 10 8 JP GP REQ Reading Writing Clock Data 0 0 0 eee CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 1 Precautions for Programming s asnan aaa ordered Gute bdeavensaG bie siglakis 11 2 Communication Example of when Safety Stations and a Standard Station are Used 11 2 1 System configuration example 0 ccc eee teens 11 2 2 Master station standard station settings 0 0 eee 11 2 3 Local station safety station settingS 0 0 ccc eae 11 2 4 Checking the network status 0 0 0 ccc ee eee teens T25 krogam example sei a o a eee act aadew een ran Ave act ace E 11 3 Using Link Special Relay SB and Link Special Register SW 08 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 1 Before Troubleshooting 1224 Lose telee tee los el eee PA ee eae VR es 12 2 Troubleshooting Procedure 0 cee eee eee teen eens 12 3 CHECKING ME LEDS apet danas oes ee tk She cae anak oo hk wide BS Saweey es AN Boe oe 12 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 4 cc0sk eek seed eeee Ook 43 oo eee ee ho eek 12 4 1 Safety communication cannot be established 0 0 0 0 eee eee 12 4 2 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed 0 000 ee eee 12 4 3 Transient transmission cannot be performed 0 000 ees 12 4 4 Station is disconnected from the network 0 0000 cee eee 12 4 5 Station is repeatedly disconne
53. Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the master station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received at least once Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 may
54. Field Local station Select H W test Write to PLC Connecting interface USB lt gt PLC module PLC Connection Network No ff Station No JHost PLC type QS001 File selection Device data Program Common Local Param Prog Select all Cancel all selections arget rogram memory Device memory v memon J Label program FB Structure M PCN twork Remote lt STOP 0 RESET RUN or powering off gt on RUN ij ust mope J _ D LINK aD Rp ERR _ _ L ERR W o i Flashing 60 Mount the master local module on the safety base unit and connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module An Ethernet cable is not connected to the master local modules Set network parameters in GX Developer as shown in the figure to left D Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Write the network parameters set in GX Developer to the safety CPU module Online lt gt Write to PLC Reset the safety CPU module or power off and on the system Hardware test begins The MODE LED of master local modules flashes and each of the x1 LED repeatedly turns on and off 1 gt 2 gt 4 58 gt 51 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 DLINK LED turns on when the test is completed When completed e When completed The x1 LED turns off S RUN MST S PW i When failed E 2l a E a iai Any one of the x1 LEDs turns
55. I 1 Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 1 l I I i I I l ION i l I Start contact OFF ALOFF l I l I l i Completion device ONI i i Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF Pad OFF i I i Completion status i issam i indication device l I Device of D2 1 OFF l I l i I Write data storage device l I Device specified in S2 3000 C S l i r maa a aa a a a aa a a a a a aaa ke a a a aaa a I 1 Sc mB a aa a a om i I I Master local module I Channel 1 l i i Network module i ee i eB eB SS S I I I Sequence scan 0 0 END Target station CPU 1 p i i Write data storage device I I Device specified in D1 3000 182 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e When failed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 ENDF 0 ENDF 0 END l l l l Start contact caa SEE ONI Completion device y Device specified in D2 QEF 7 OFF i ION i Completion status indication OFF OFF device Device of D2 1 I 1 scan i _ _ I Write data storage device Device specified in S2 3000 Gi I I l PA J I i Device of S1 1 D Error code Own station CPU Master local module O 3 D 5 5 2 Target station error 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Developer Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics lt s
56. Information Select All Clear All Selections 5 Station Type Master Station Operating 0 1 Operating Local Station Operating Local Station BEB RPP RRP RRP RRR a 6 Link Start Stop Executing Contents Link Start Link Stop Forced Link Start Forced Link Start will be executed for the station that is link stopped by other stations or the station that is link stopped by special relay special register TORR ROMERO ORORR ORO REED OO Of ft ft nn a he mAn request te link start stop contents in stations that are on selected status in all stations information Link status might not be changed immediately because of circuit status Factor Please reopen window or check in network configuration when there is no change in link status Close Point Mode The link start stop is not available in loop test mode CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Select a station for starting or stopping cyclic transmission in Selected Status When GX Developer is connected to a local station only own station can be selected The connected station can be checked in Network Status Select whether to start or stop cyclic transmission in Link Start Stop Executing Contents Selecting Forced Link Start will forcibly start cyclic transmission of the station where cyclic transmission was stopped by a command from another station or by link special relay SB or link special register
57. Legends button to see a description of the background colors Shows module status Open the description window of the icon with the Legends button 3 If is displayed refer to If is displayed in Network Status and take corrective actions Eg Page 136 Section 9 3 2 4 Displays a port to which an Ethernet cable is connected Network configuration display area 2 Display of network configuration Network configuration is displayed according to the connection status Actual system configuration Star topology Master station GX Developer safety station Switching hub E Station No 0 z 2 3 i f Local station Local station Local station safety station safety station 7 safety station Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Network configuration window display Connected Station MasterSafety 0 Divergence PI LocalS afety 1 a LocalS afety 2 Ey LocalS afety 3 Actual system configuration Line topology GX Developer Master station Local station Local station safety station safety station al safety station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Network configuration window display Connected Station MasterSafet0 LocalSafety 1 LocalS afety 2 P i E
58. Network No 1 Station No 0 d r Target Station _ Communication Information Outwart gt Network No o Count Times 2 Station No 2 Communication Time 0 ms Communication test has been completed Inward Outward Inward Network No No 1 No2 Own Target Station Station Point Write the network parameters set in GX Developer to the safety CPU module Online gt Write to PLC Reset the safety CPU module or power off and on the system Open the Communication Test window and enter values for Target Station and Communication Data Setting Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics gt Communication Test button Click the button to perform the communication test If an error occurs take actions according to the error message When conducting the test on relay stations set the receiving relay station in Target Station Setting the sending relay station will cause an error Network No 1 Station No 0 Own station request source Receiving 76 Network No 2 Station Station No 1 No 2 Station No 0 Sending relay station relay station CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING This chapter describes CC Link IE Field Network parameters The network parameters are set for either the master station or slave stations This manual describes network parameters for mast
59. No and function version of a master local module can be checked on the rating plate the front of the module and the system monitor of GX Developer 1 Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of the master local module CC Link IE Elieta MELSEC QS a MITSUBISHI aes MAC address e3 MODEL Serial No first 5 digits MAC ADD J u lt La mi 20 ar SERIAL 13041 0000000000 A lt _ J Function version J Relevant regulation standards MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAP 2 Checking on the front of the module The serial No and function version on the rating plate are printed on the front at the bottom of the module QS0J71 GF11 T2 a Ta Function version 321 UOISJO A UONOUNY pue JOQLUUNN jenas y BulyoeuD 6 xIpueddy 3 Checking using GX Developer The serial No and function version can be checked on Product Information List in System Monitor Diagnostics gt System monitor gt Product Inf List button Product Information List ILC os OSOO01CPI QS0771GF11 Tz 32pt oooo L30410000000000 Nore Nore Nore CSW file creating Point The serial No displayed on the product information list dialogue box of GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate and the front of the module e The serial No on the rating plate and the front of the module indicates the management information of the pr
60. Ny Both stations detect a communication error and register the error information to the safety CPU module of own station Communication error detected Each master local module on both stations transfers error information to the safety CPU module Error information is registered as an error log uoun uoneysibes Hoj 10113 uonouny uonediunwwoy Ajeje Communication error 3 Checking method The registered error information can be checked on the PLC diagnostics of GX Developer GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual 99 8 1 3 Safety station interlock function 100 When a communication error has occurred between safety stations communication is automatically cut to prevent incorrect input or output from the error station The safety communication between the stations becomes safety station interlock status and it does not resume until the safety interlock status is released Note that standard communication automatically resumes even under the safety interlock status if the communication error cause is eliminated The safety station interlock function prevents equipment stopped by a communication error from suddenly resuming its operation after it recovers from the error 1 Checking method Under the safety station interlock status the bit of the following special relay or special registers turn
61. PORT 2 044 Normal loopback communication in progress on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 104 Normal cable disconnected on PORT1 communication in progress on PORT 2 114 Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT1 and PORT2 124 Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT 1 establishing line on PORT2 21 4 Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 22 Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 and PORT2 40 Normal cable disconnected on PORT1 loopback communication in progress on PORT2 Stores the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit us Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at the own station s PORT1 Unit When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT 1 Unit When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at the own station s PORT2 Unit When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT2 Unit When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the number
62. Page 309 Appendix 5 5 Release the interlock using safety station interlock release request SM1720 SD1720 to SD1727 gt Page 100 Section 8 1 3 Set a safety station for Communication Target Station No L gt Page 90 Section 7 6 Correct Safety Data Transfer Device Setting set for the safety stations that perform safety communication Page 90 Section 7 6 Correct Safety Data Transfer Device Setting or the refresh parameters Overlap of a transfer target device can be checked in the Assignment Image window through a programming tool supported by the programmable controller used _ gt Page 88 Section 7 5 2 If the above actions do not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test lt gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 242 12 4 2 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Cyclic transmission cannot be performed The following lists the actions to be taken if cyclic data are not delivered to the master or a slave station Check item Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station on In the network configuration settings of the master station is a slave station specified as a reserved station In the network configuration settings of the master station is RX RY Setting or RWw RWr Setting for slave stations configured Do the station numbers set in the network configur
63. RX Station No 1 Station No 2 RY EELA O to station from station No 1 No 1 t Station No 2 Station No 1 Station WR No 2 RWw from station No 1 e Station No 2 Y _ from station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 1 I Station No 2 iia ae Station No 1 Station No 2 W Send range O from station No 1 No 2 1FF y 1200 Send range from station SIILI AGAL 0 F X 1200 Station See gu Hl 120F Station No 2 zy z e to station to station No 1 No 1 os Ro Lt Lt Lt Lt u m i fo a Di S O to station Y Send range 1200 DNUHHUEUEEAIIN TE E from station I NOFA 120F es a a ee ee hl tl hl th lr hl ll el el el el hl el eh et SS le _ aaa eee E E l lll l ll I Area for sending to other stations h Standard communication transmission from the master station standard station gt Standard communication transmission from the local station safety station HI Safety communication Link refresh 212 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 2 2 Master station standard station settings Connect GX Works2 to the master station standard station and set parameters Setting Master station standard station Local station safety station Local station safety station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2
64. SW0008 Link stop start direction Data link stop request station Data link start status entire system Data link stop status entire system CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING b Cyclic transmission stop restart own station Cyclic transmission stop 7 Turn on Link stop own station SB0001 2 When the master local module accepts the request Link stop request accept status own station SB0052 turns on 3 When cyclic transmission stop is completed Link stop completion status own station SB0053 turns on 4 if cyclic transmission is stopped with error an error code will be stored in Data link stop status own station SW0051 5 Turn off Link stop own station SB0001 Cyclic transmission restart 6 Turn on Link start own station SB0000 7 When the master local module accepts the request Link start request accept status own station SB0050 turns on 8 When cyclic transmission restart is completed Link start completion status own station SB0051 turns on 9 Ifthe cyclic transmission is restarted with error an error code will be stored in Data link start status own station SW0050 10 Turn off Link start own station SB0000 SB0000 Data link start status own station SB0001 Data link stop status own station MS 13 Ss16 jeloeds yu17 pue gs Aej y jeloeds yurq BuIsN E L 223 2 Checking data link status Data link status is checked by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics
65. Station 2 oo ore 256 ooaj oF The column contents For refresh device will be changed corresponding to refresh parameter setting i Please reopen the window after completing refresh parameter setting when changing refresh param 4 Display the refresh parameter window and set parameters as follows KO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt button Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameters Module No 1 Assignment Method i Points Start i Start End E Side Jie Side N Si Mame fonts aE Transfer SE s p sf o mare SW Sa il are xf sie ooo oon sia 1000 siaj onoono obo1FF manta wr coco oirr 0011FF D a eae a E 5 Write the parameters to the CPU module on the master station standard station and either reset or power it off and on X Online gt gt Write to PLC lt or powering off gt on Point In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For parameter setting refer to the parameter explanation chapter in the following T User s manual for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module used 214 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 2 3 Local station safety station settings Connect GX Developer to a local station safety station and set parameters Setting Setting Master station standard station Local station safety station Local stat
66. Synchronous mode SM of sending station 2 ms SM of sending station 2 ms Or or LS x ax 2 2 ms LS 2 ms 1 Use the larger value SM e To calculate transmission interval monitoring time on the active side Sequence scan time of the active side maximum value e To calculate transmission interval monitoring time on the passive side Sequence scan time of the passive side maximum value LS Link scan time Q Number of safety connections at the sending station 8 Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer If time between a safety data transmission and the next safety data transmission on the sending station exceeds the transmission interval monitoring time the receiving station detects an safety monitoring timeout error and stops safety communication The safety data to be received from the sending station is cleared at the time Point When the safety CPU module detects a safety monitoring timeout error check if the transmission interval monitoring time satisfies the formula above If the difference between the transmission interval monitoring time of own station and that of the communication target station is four times or more change the transmission interval monitoring time so that the difference stays less than four times APPENDICES Appendix 5 5 Safety refresh monitoring time Safety refresh monitoring time is the time monitored by the receiving station for each safety connection to de
67. Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following C gt Page 152 Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of an REQ instruction The execution status completion or error of the REQ instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the REQ instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the REQ instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the REQ instruction fails 200 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d REQ instruction execution timing When the start contact starts up from OFF to ON the processing is performed one time e When completed Own station CPU Master local module Network module Target station CPU Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END l l l ON I I l Start contact OFF OFF l Completion device ON l Device specified in D2 OFF Pad OFF Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 OFF I 1 scan _ _ _ Channel 1 i Sequence scan Clock data read write _ eee i ed 201 eyeq YO0 D Bunupy 6ulpesy OFY dO df 804 202 e When failed i i l REQ l i i
68. a She wd ee eae ll ee ba en 30 Refresh parameters 0 000 eee eee 86 Relay Station 32250 Gec2s bob idew ee a eee 16 Relevant manuals 0 0 0 e eee T Remote operation n on aaae 151 Reserved station function disable 119 Reserved station specification 119 Reserved error invalid station 82 REUN a ade Woes dP cle Med ay ata h bt aad aa Ads BP an 16 Routing parameters 0 00 eee eee 92 RUNG eo aeaa n a an E A aed 262 RUN TED Z meinaa ae aE a a a aE a 30 RWr offset size information 43 RWr offset size information buffer memory address 20224 to 20463 4F00 to 4FEFy 270 RWw offset size information 43 RWw offset size information buffer memory address 19968 to 20207 4E00 to 4EEF 270 RWw RWr Setting o an aaa 82 RX offset size information ooann anaana aa 42 RX offset size information buffer memory address 19456 to 19695 4C00 to 4CEF 269 RXRY SCUING 2354 2 de ne a aide eels 82 W RY offset size information 000 42 RY offset size information buffer memory address WIN aikn i e cts wae ate wate Se sa a a 34 19712 to 19951 4D00 to 4DEFW 269 A dl als Reece ee ae a eae ene eee ee 64 S Safety communication ooann aaan 15 19 Safety Communication Setting 90 Safety connection anaua aa aa 15 Safety CPU MOdUle cweon was se
69. and S1 5 When the reading of the data specified in S2 is completed the following devices are turned on e Own station Completion device D2 e Target station Read notification device D3 Own station Target station Safety CPU module Master local module CPU module Network module Channel 1 D1 S2 Channel 2 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Page 152 Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the SREAD instruction The execution status completion or error of the SREAD instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SREAD instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SREAD instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the SREAD instruction fails 170 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d SREAD instruction execution timing e When completed Start contact GEE 1 Completion device Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF 1 Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 OFF l l l l l l Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END l l I l l l l l l l ON rad Device
70. e Size buffer memory address 20225 station No 1 x 2 270 APPENDICES Appendix 2 6 Own station information buffer memory address 20512 to 20536 50204 to 5038 This buffer memory stores the own station s information on the network 1 Own station network card information buffer memory address 20512 to 20515 50204 to 5023 20512 50201 Manufacturer code This buffer memory stores the own station s master local 20513 50214 Model type module information The following values are stored in the model code a Model code 6 When the standard station is set as the station type 20515 5023 4 7 When the safety station is set as the station type 2 Own station controller information buffer memory address 20520 to 20536 50284 to 5038 Address Description This buffer memory stores whether the value stored in the own eee eae ee 20520 5028 ail information valid invalid na information is valid or invalid 1 Valid 20521 50294 Manufacturer code 20522 502Ap Model type 20523 502By Model code This buffer memory stores the own station s master local 20524 502Cy Version module information 20525 to 20534 502D to 5036p Model name string 20535 to 20536 50374 to 50384 Vendor specific device information sessolppy How y yng jo sjielaq z xipueddy Hgeag o Hozos gesog 01 ZLGOZ sseippe Aow aw saynq UOI EWUOJUI UOI E S UME QZ Xipuaddy 2 1 Appendix 2 7 Other station
71. each station s PORT 1 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 sworzol 16 15 14 19 12 10 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SW0120 PORT1 error frame SW0121 to reception status each SW0122 O een a sw0123 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo12also 7o 7e 77 76 7s 7a 7a 72 71 7060 60 67 6 65 sw0125 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Sw0126 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 109 99 98 97 swo127 fraott9ft aft t7 rte 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SWO0A 298 Number SW0130 to SW0137 SW0140 to SW0147 PORT2 error frame reception status each station PORT1 error frame detection each station Description Stores the station number receiving an error frame on the transmission path at each station s PORT2 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of the own station s PORT 2 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of the own station s PORT 2 When Clear communication
72. expansion By reserving a slave station link device assignment will not change even if the e No Setting Reserved Error Invalid slave station is added or the reservation is cancelled Therefore the Reserved Station Station program needs not to be modified Physical connection of the slave Invalid Station station is not required Default Blank e Invalid Station Even if a slave station is disconnected during data link the master station safety station will not detect the slave station as a faulty station However if a local station safety station set as an error invalid station or a temporary error invalid station is disconnected an error will occur in safety communication with the disconnected station Up to 8 characters Alias Enter the name of a device on the slave station if required Default Blank oo Up to 32 characters Comment Enter the comment of the slave station if required Default Blank 82 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING Set link scan mode and block data assurance per station CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Constant Sean ms 1 to 200 C Synchronous Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Block Data Assurance per Station J Assure Black Data Cancel 1 Link Scan Mode Setting Item Description Link scan is performed a
73. information buffer memory address 20544 to 24383 5040 to 5F3F This buffer memory stores other stations information on the network 1 Other station network card information station No 1 buffer memory address 20544 to 20551 50404 to 5047 Address Name Description 20545 504114 This buffer memory stores another station s station No 1 20546 50424 information 20548 to 20551 5044 to 5047 2 Other station controller information station No 1 buffer memory address 20552 to 20575 50484 to 505F Address Description This buffer memory stores whether the value stored in another Controller information valid invalid station controller information station No 1 is valid or invalid flag 0 Invalid 1 Valid 20552 50484 20553 50494 Manufacturer code 20554 504A Model type 20555 504B 4 Model code This buffer memory stores another station s station No 1 20556 504C Version 20557 to 20566 504D to 5056p Model name string master local module information 20567 to 20568 50574 to 5058 Vendor specific device information 20569 to 20575 50594 to 505F 14 System area 3 Other station information station No 2 to No 120 buffer memory address 20576 to 24383 50604 to 5F3F The information for station No 2 to No 120 is stored in the same order as the information for other station network card information station No 1 and other station contro
74. local Mitsubishi representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Transient data received twice e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set Error code D2014 D2024 D2034 D2044 D205 D206 D2074 D2084 D2094 to D20Ay D20B D20Cy D20D D20E D20Fy D210 D211 D212 D213 D2144 D2154 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Action Header information error in transient Correct the header information at the request source and retry the transmission operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation Send buffer full e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly Read write address error in transient Correct the read write address at the request source and retry the transmission operation e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation Network No error in transient i i KINN e If the request source is on another network check if the routing transmission parameters are correctly set Target station No error in transient Correct the target station number at the request source and
75. local module Output status setting for CPU STOP is set to STOP whether cyclic data output is held or cleared can be Page 115 Section 8 2 6 selected During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from the slave station and data Page 116 Section 8 2 7 Cyclic transmission stop and restart transmission from own stations are stopped Also the stopped Page 138 Section 9 4 cyclic transmission is restarted Transient transmission is not stopped uonejys AjaJes uONels 13 sew e se jnpow jeoojasew y BuisA 1 e s 35 3 Transient transmission Transient transmission is performed to other stations using By setting the routing parameters communication path using GX Function Communication within the same network Communication with different networks 4 RAS function Function Slave station disconnection Automatic return Loopback function Page 152 CHAPTER 10 dedicated instructions and GX Developer Developer in advance transient transmission can be performed to stations on different networks through dedicated instructions or GX Developer Seamless communication is available with the following networks Page 92 Section 7 7 e Ethernet Page 118 Section 8 3 2 e CC Link IE Controller Network e MELSECNET H e MELSECNET 10 e CC Link when using GX Developer Only the slave station where an error occurs is disconnected and data link continues w
76. lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mod 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2010 12 22 09 39 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 2010 12 22 09 39 07 Station No 2 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 37 46 Station No 1 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 33 49 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station b Clear Event History History Acquisition Setting B Create CSV File Refresh 141 9 6 Canceling Restoring Reserved Station Setting A reservation for a slave station can be temporarily cancelled Use this function to cancel the reservation of a slave station when it is connected to the network or to reset it as a reserved station 1 Selecting the target module in Network Status a Temporarily canceling a reservation Network Status Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter Total Slave Stations 2 Current Link 1 The Number of Connected Scan Time MS Stations Error Oc
77. occurred Use CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics to identify the cause of the error and take actions 7 Page 127 Section 9 2 Ex If an error occurs in a local station safety station station No 1 network Status Total Slave Stations J 2 Total Slave Stations Zz Curren Set In Parameter Connected Scan T Connected Station Master 0 Station Mo 1 Station Mo 218 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 2 5 Program example This section shows a program example 1 Safety communication among local stations safety stations a Devices used in the program e Devices used by the user Device Description M10 Safety station interlock cancel request signal SD1700 0 Safety station interlock status of local station safety station station No 1 SD1720 0 Safety station interlock cancel request of local station safety station station No 1 SD1700 1 Safety station interlock status of local station safety station station No 2 SD1720 1 Safety station interlock cancel request of local station safety station station No 2 b Program example 1 Create the following program in the project for local stations safety stations of station No 1 and station No 2 using GX Developer Program for a local station safety station of station No 1 MIO SD1700 1 fi 1 een Safety station interlock with SD1700 1 SD1720 1 station No 2 is released k_m RT SD1720 1 R o1 y Program for a local station safety station
78. occurring 034 STOP Continuation error occurring RUN Normal RUN Continuation error occurring Reset in progress Initial processing Stores the parameter status 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 246 Section 12 5 O Condition e This is enabled when the Received parameter error SB004D is on Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by Link start own station SB0000 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 246 Section 12 5 When Link start own station SBOOOO is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by Link stop own station SB0001 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 246 Section 12 5 When Link stop own station SBO001 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off 289 SI7 MS Ja sIBay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy Availability Master Number Description station Local safety station station Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by System link start SBO002 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station Page 246 Section 12 5 Data link start status SW0052 entire system l l Se When System link start SB0002 is turned off the store
79. of the station where loopback is being performed The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 2 SW0071 0 No loopback stations 1 to 120 Slave station 125 Master station 255 Station number not set If loopback occurs at a station whose station number is duplicated the station number is stored in this register Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Availability Master station safety station Local station Number SW0071 SW0074 SW0075 SW0076 SW0077 SW007A SW007C SW007D Loopback station number 2 PORT1 cable disconnection detection count PORT1 receive error detection count PORT 1 total no of received data lower 1 word PORT total no of received data upper 1 word Event count PORT2 cable disconnection detection count PORT2 receive error detection count APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 1 SW0070 0 No loopback stations 1 to 120 Slave station 125 Master station 255 Station number not set If loopback occurs at a station whose station number is duplicated the station number is stored in this register Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047
80. on O Bit that turns on N A Stations l communicated Station to be Safety station interlock status Safety master station 4 interlock status through safety check SD1700 to SD1707 a SM1700 communication Master station Master station safety safety station station and local station Local station safety station O safety station Local station safety l Local station station and local station safety station safety station 4 A bit that turns on is the one designated for the station No of the local station safety station which is in safety communication with own station CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Releasing method The safety station interlock status is released when the bit of the following special relay or special registers is turned on O Bit that turns on N A Srtong Safety station interlock Safety master station communicated Station to be release request interlock release request through safety checked SD1720 to SD1727 SM1720 communication Master station Master station safety safety station Local station safety station O safety station Local station safety Local station station and local station safety station safety station 4 A bit that turns on is the one designated for the station No of the local station safety station which is in safety communication with own station Request release of the safety station
81. on and the ERR LED turns go so Cee h x100 _ ERR _ _ L ERR Bon When the test fails the possible cause is hardware failure x10 a Bf Flashing of the master local modules Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative with the eed alee detailed problem description S JCIE Run mst l I move E Gp Link La sol C RD x1004 _Ii e ERR E L ERR E o x10 x1 LE Flashing The test status and result can be checked through monitoring the link special relays on GX Developer Item Description e Hardware test completion status SBO090 ON When completed e Hardware test normal abnormal end SB0091 OFF e Hardware test completion status SB0O090 ON When failed e Hardware test normal abnormal end SB0091 ON 2 Precautions S98 DIEMPJEH 1 79 BuIA BOJeg S S L 79 a Settings Do not enter values for Network Configuration Setting and Refresh parameters When link refresh is executed during a hardware test the test may fail b Operations Do not access the buffer memory through the program during the hardware test Doing so may cause the test to fail 61 6 2 2 Self loopback test Self loopback test checks the communication circuit of the master local module Point When conducting the self loopback test use a normal Ethernet cable lt Page 56 Section 5 2 7 Mount the master local module on the safety base unit and connect GX Developer t
82. own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup starts after power on or Ethernet cable connection may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Number SB0072 SB0073 SB0074 SB0075 SB0077 SB0078 SB007A SB007B SB007D SB0090 Scan mode setting information Operation status specified for CPU stop error Reserved station specification status Error invalid station setting status Parameter reception status Loopback function setting status Event history status Input data status of data link faulty station Hold clear status setting for CPU STOP Hardware test completion status Description
83. part overlaps with the device set for another refresh parameter Correct the refresh parameters 88 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 3 Precautions a Device set to Device PLC side Set a device range that differs from the one used for the following e Refresh parameters for other network modules e Auto refresh parameters for CC Link Safety master module e O numbers used for network modules b Link refresh range Set only link devices used in the safety CPU module for link refresh range Doing so will reduce link refresh points resulting in a shorter link refresh time c Changing link device assignment in the Network Configuration Setting window Correct the link refresh ranges of refresh parameters 4 Setting example For setting example refer to gt Page 209 CHAPTER 11 SJOJOWCICd YSOI9Y GZ 89 7 6 Safety Communication Setting Assignment Method Set safety communication parameters for stations that perform safety communication This setting can be configured when CC IE Field Master station Safety and CC IE Field Local station Safety are set in network setting 1 Setting procedure 1 Open the setting window in GX Developer XW Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET 2 gt button 2 Set parameters in the window 3 Click the Eni button E Network Parameter CC IE Field Safety Communication Setting Module No 1 SE A Set up
84. per Station l Assure Block Data Cancel 2 Program that detects loopback station numbers master station safety station only By detecting loopback station numbers a faulty station can be found Whether loopback is being performed or not can be checked by Loopback function setting status SB0O078 and Loopback status SB0065 Ex Program that stores loopback station numbers to D1000 and D1001 SB49 SET M1000 Data link status is checked M1000 B78 SB65 o E p r OTT TO Move SW D1001 Loopback station number 2 is stored For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the following Page 273 Appendix 3 Page 286 Appendix 4 3 Precautions a Loopback during safety communication When an error occurs on the safety station which is in safety communication the safety monitoring timeout error may be detected before the loopback function is performed If the safety monitoring timeout error is detected release the safety station interlock function and resume safety communication gt Page 100 Section 8 1 3 122 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Loopback function setting and network configuration For ring topology select Use in Loopback Function Setting For network topology other than ring topology clear the checkbox If the loopback function setting and the network configuration are inconsistent an error may occur in all stations and data link cannot be perfor
85. program Data is assured by performing interlocks on programs 1 32 bit data assurance The RWr and RWw data can be assured in 32 bit units To enable 32 bit data assurance disable block data assurance per station XW Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Network Configuration Setting button gt Supplementary Setting button CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous Constant Scan ms 1 to 200 C Synchronous Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Clear the checkbox 4 106 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS a Access to cyclic data When link devices are accessed the integrity of the 32 bit data can be assured by accessing RWr and RWw with the following conditions satisfied e The start device number of RWr RWw is multiples of 2 e The number of points assigned to RWr RWw is multiples of 2 Safety CPU module Master local module Device RWr RWw Access by using start device No which is multiples of 2 and Link refresh in 2 word 32 bit units 1 32 bits Point For data assurance of more than 32 bits use the block data assurance per station or interlock programs 107 AysBejul eyep o10A0 Jo BOUeINSSY Zg uoIssilusuel DOAD Zg 2 Block data assurance per
86. rele system monitor in the selected station and check the aa n PLC rate Star ae Pe operation and change PLC status for ae EEL If an error occurs in the safety CPU module click the System monitor button to check the error details and corrective actions Various tests and operations can be performed from Operation Test Information Confirmation Set and Selected Station Operation on the bottom left of the window gt Page 138 Section 9 4 to Page 151 Section 9 8 CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Module Module Network No 1 Sa Station No 1 Error Total Slave Stations Total EES ae tion gin ent Uk ink The Number of Set In Parameter 2 Coni Scan Ti Stations Error Occurs Connected Station MasterSafety 0 Divergence i E o LocalSafety 2 Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Mode Online Cable Test Various tests and operations can be performed Enable the reserved station Also check the station No set as the reserved station from the list sonsoubeiq Bues z6 walid station setting rest Promy alid Station Tempor re ey tation NO Pte s temporal ae sept Gran Setting Re e eee Se rs ce a stem monitor in the selected station and check jote operation and change PLC e 129 9 3 Diagnostic Window This section describes items displayed in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window 1 Displayed items CC I
87. scan takes much time than link scan input transmission delay time will become longer e To keep transmission delay time constant In the PLC Parameter setting of the safety CPU module Constant Scanning must be set and the sequence scan must be set to be performed at the specified intervals 2 Setting method Scan synchronization is specified in Network Configuration Setting gt Page 81 Section 7 3 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 5 Input status setting in case of failure For the master local module whether to hold or clear input data from a data link faulty station can be set Status Range where the settings are enabled Clearing or holding the following RX and RY input data can be selected e Master station RX e Local station RX and RY only the input data from other stations Even if Clear is set input data will be held for two seconds after disconnection Input status of data link faulty station The RWr and RWw input data are held regardless of any setting e Master station RWr e Local station RWr and RWw only the input data from other stations Area for which Clear or Hold can be selected in the data link faulty station input status setting Area where data are cleared when a stop error occurs in the safety CPU module Area where data are held regardless of the setting Station No 0 StationNo 1 A SiationNo 2 Master station safety station RX Station No 1 st
88. station turns on The contents of W600 to W603 are stored in DO to D3 Upon completion of storage in DO to D3 Y1000 at the receiving station for a handshake is turned on 109 7 When the data are sent to the receiving station Y1000 at the sending station is turned off When X1000 at the receiving station turns off Y1000 at the receiving station is turned off b Example of interlock using devices other than X and Y The following shows an example of sending data in WO to W3 of the master station safety station station No 0 to W600 to W603 of the local station station No 1 This is a method used when X and Y cannot be used as interlock devices BO and B600 are used for a handshake to the safety CPU modules of RWr and RYWw Master station safety station Station No 0 Local station Station No 1 A Sending station Receiving station Master local module Master local module Master station safety station Station No 0 Sending station MO BO B600 BMOV DO wo K4 ee SET BO B600 a SA BO Local station Station No 1 Receiving station B600 BMOV W600 DO K4 SET BO RST BO Safety CPU Master station Local Safety CPU Data flow module safety station station module wo RWwo0 RWwo N wo i i e request _ MINE SUN D x Send data W s Ja RWwFE0 E SRwwFEO SET BO S w600 ji RWro RWr0 a Gut Fp B600 a RWrFEO RWrFEO The send request turns on py 4a
89. stations of station No 1 and station No 2 TD Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt E button E Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameter Module No 1 216 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 5 Configure safety communication setting Set devices for the local stations safety stations of station No 1 and station No 2 so that they do not overlap with ones set for refresh parameters TH Project data list lt gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt button Station No 1 E Network Parameter CC IE Field Safety Communication Setting Module No 1 Set up safety communication Assignment Method Total Number of Stations Points Start eo Host Station No Em G Start End Transmission Interval 25 Monitoring Time aia Communication Safety Refresh Safety Data Transfer Device Setting i Target Open Method Monitoring Time Send Data Storage Device Station No ms Device Name Points Stat End Device Name Points Stat End _ 2 gt Target Station ae 16 po Target Station PE Target Station pow Tastan oo Ee Target Station Station No 2 E Network Parameter CC JE Field Safety Communication Setting Module No 1 Set up safety communication Assignment Method Total Number of Stations M pu meta Host Station No Start End NE Transmission Interval 5 mi Monitoring Time Communi
90. switching hub If the above actions do not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for an error e Hardware test lt _ gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test lt gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 e Cable test L gt Page 74 Section 6 4 2 12 4 6 Communication is unstable The following lists the troubleshooting actions to be taken when link scan time or transmission delay time is long or when a transient transmission timeout occurred Check item Action If the L ERR LED is on or flashing perform troubleshooting L gt Page 241 Section 12 3 6 Is the ambient temperature for the module within the specified Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking range action such as removing heat source Is the L ERR LED of the master or slave station off Is any error shown in Selected Station Communication Status If an error is identified at PORT1 or PORT2 perform a cable test and a Monitor of CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics self loopback test Is there any noise affecting the system Check the wiring condition If the above actions do not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for an wojdwAs Aq Bulooussjqnos yZ error e Hardware test lt gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 e Cable test gt Page 74 Section 6 4 2 p jp uuov PUL PaJOsUUODSIP Ajpe ee
91. the baton pass status for master station OFF Normal ON Error Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station OFF Cyclic transmission for all stations in progress ON Cyclic transmission not executed for some stations If cyclic transmission are not executed for some stations the status of each station can be checked by Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO00B7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO0B7 may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the cyclic transmission status for the master station OFF Normal ON Error O Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if there are any reserved stations OFF No reserved stations ON Reserved stations found When a reserved station has been set each station status can be checked using Reserved station setting status SW00C0 to SWO00C7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Reserved station setting status SW00C0 to SWO00C7 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if there are any error
92. the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point Incorrect loading of the module can cause a failure or drop Secure the module to the base unit with screws Tighten the screw in the specified torque range If the screws are too loose it may cause a drop of the screw or module Overtightening may cause a drop due to the damage of the screw or module Completely turn off the external supply power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so could result in damage to the product Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure Wiring Precautions WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external supply power used by the system before wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When energizing or operating the module after installation or wiring be sure to close the attached terminal cover Not doing so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Tighten a module fixing screw within the specified torque range If the module fixing screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the screw or module Overtightening the screw may cause a drop due to the damage of the screw or module Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Su
93. the target station s CPU type is different than that of the control CPU the instruction is not executed However an error does not occur in the request source When executing a WRITE instruction under the following conditions Target station s CPU type Multi CPU No 1 O3E0n Target station No All stations FFH 000000 000000 000000 000000 A a Control CPU setting O xX Since the control CPU of the CC Link IE Field Network module is No 2 the instruction to multi CPU No 1 is not executed 157 suolonJ su p edip q JO suoned ld ZOL SUOI ONIJSU pa edIp p Yul JOJ SUOIINEDAJdg Z OL 10 3 Understanding the Documentation on Dedicated Instructions The following page illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Instruction name N 10 4 JPIGP READX Reading Data from Another Station s Programmable Controller Execution condition of the instruction Reads data from the device of another statioggsfogrammable controller In units of words iJ wren on 3 00 00 JP READ Jn S1 KM D1 D2 a S2 Structure of the instruction Start contact
94. they are assigned from SW0000 to SWO1FF Point e Available link special registers are the same for all safety CPU operation modes e Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the link special register SW list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system e For the usage of the link special register SW refer to lt gt Page 221 Section 11 3 Number SW0000 Link stop start direction SW0001 to SW0008 SW0010 Ai station function SW0017 Sled ep emar invalid station setting SW0030 Send receive instruction 1 processing result APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Sets the station where cyclic transmission is stopped or started 004 Own station 011 All stations 024 Specified station 804 Own station Forced link start 81 All stations Forced link start 8214 Specified station Forced link start Stopping starting of cyclic transmission is performed by System link start SB0002 or System link stop SB0003 When setting 024 or 82 by the Link stop start direction SW0000 this sets the station No that stops or starts cyclic transmission 0 No direction issued for stop or start 1 Direction issued for stop or start b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swoooi re 15 14 13 12 10 9 7 6 84 32 1 swo00a st 3029 28 2r 26 25 ae 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 swoo0a 48 a7 ae a l
95. time and date If an error occurs during initial processing of the safety CPU module 0000 00 00 00 00 00 will be displayed 140 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 2 Clearing event history 1 Click the cear venttistory button in the Network mesos Event toy x Event History window i Network Event History List Detailed Information Event detected station Event history contents g i t Information 0011 2010 12 22 09 39 28 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo Continue error in 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Station No 1 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Master Station lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or ma 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mod 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2010 12 22 09 39 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 2010 12 22 09 39 07 Station No 2 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 37 46 Station No 1 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 33 49 Ma
96. to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action C gt Page 246 Section 12 5 172 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Program example Just like the READ instruction program example this program example is for reading data of D250 to D254 of station No 4 target station into D700 to D704 of station No 0 own station when M101 is turned on Furthermore when the read notification device D3 of the target station is turned on Y60 of the target station is turned on Compared to the READ instruction program example the SREAD instruction program example has a different section where the read notification device D3 is specified at the end of the arguments lt gt Page 166 Section 10 4 4 a System configuration example Same as the READ instruction program example b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Same as the READ instruction program example e Devices used by users The devices used in the SREAD instruction request source station No 0 are the same as those in the READ instruction program example Devices used in the SREAD instruction request destination station No 4 M107 Read notification device ys Read completion device c SREAD instruction setting Same as the READ instruction program example 173 UOHE S JOYJOUY UO Ja OJUOD jqewweboId ay Woy eyeq Bulpeey AYIYS d9 df GOL 174 d Pr
97. whether cyclic data output is held or cleared can be Page 115 Section 8 2 6 selected During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from the slave station and data Page 116 Section 8 2 7 Cyclic transmission stop and restart transmission from own stations are stopped Also the stopped Page 138 Section 9 4 cyclic transmission is restarted Transient transmission is not stopped 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 Transient transmission a a Transient transmission is performed to other stations using Communication within the same network Page 152 CHAPTER 10 dedicated instructions and GX Developer By setting the routing parameters communication path using GX Developer in advance transient transmission can be performed to stations on different networks through dedicated instructions or GX Developer Seamless communication is available with the following networks Page 92 Section 7 7 e Ethernet Page 118 Section 8 3 2 e CC Link IE Controller Network e MELSECNET H e MELSECNET 10 e CC Link when using GX Developer Communication with different networks 4 Diagnostic function Function Description Reference The status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked by GX CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Developer The faulty area cause of the fault and its corrective Page 124 CHAPTER 9 action and event history can be checked in GX Developer o2 o N
98. with the EMC Low Voltage and Machinery Directives Before using this product please read this manual the relevant manuals the manuals for standard programmable controllers and the safety standards carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The descriptions are based on the requirements of the Directives and the harmonized standards However they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Low Voltage and Machinery Directives The manufacture of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the EMC Low Voltage and Machinery Directives RELEVANT MANUALS 1 Introduction Manual Read the following manual before designing and constructing a safety system Manual name lt manual number model code gt Safety Application Guide lt SH 080613ENG 13JR90 gt Description Explains the overview construction method laying and wiring examples and application programs of the safety related system 2 CC Link IE Field Network relevant manuals When using CC Link IE Field Network for the first time refer to this manual The following table lists and describes CC Link IE Field Network manuals Manual name lt manual number model code gt MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual lt SH 080917ENG 13JZ47 gt MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Mo
99. x x x x9 Use prohibited xA x x6 x0 XE AG Use prohibited X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X14 Y14 X16 Y16 a Use prohibited 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Point Do not use turn on any use prohibited signals as an input or output signal to the safety CPU module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system For details on the I O signals refer to I O Signals lt _ gt Page 264 Appendix 1 sjeuBls O I JO3SIT v e 41 3 9 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The buffer memory is used to exchange data between the master local module and the safety CPU module The buffer memory values are defaulted when the power is turned off or the safety CPU module is reset Address Decimal Hexadecimal 0 to 1023 0 to 3FFy 1024 to 2047 4004 to 7FFy 2048 to 10239 800 to 27FFy 10240 to 18431 18432 to 18463 48004 to 481F 18464 to 18975 48204 to 4A1Fp 18976 to 19455 4A20 to 4BFFp 19456 4C00 19457 4C011 4 to 19694 4CEE 19695 4CEF 19696 to 19711 4CFO to 4CFFp 19712 4D00p 19713 4D01p to 19950 4DEEp 19951 4DEFp 19952 to 19967 ADFO to 4DFFp 42 Link device area System area Link special relay SB Link special register SW Initial value Read write e 18432 to 18433 for read and write e 18434 to 18463 for read only e 18464 to 18495 for read and write e 18496 to 18975 for read only
100. yONpOJg Hunsixy ue ym uoswedwoy xipueddy network is displayed For the master station the event history of the Network event history l Page 140 Section 9 5 entire network can be displayed and so it can be used for troubleshooting at network start up E Slave stations that are not set in the master station parameters can Slave station additional functions i be added during data link Other Reserved Station Reserved station specification can be temporarily canceled without Page 119 Section 8 4 functions Function disable changing the parameters Page 142 Section 9 6 jnpow edo Je SeW SU pue jnpow 13sew Ajajes yUIT DD OU ua m q UOSIeEdWOD Z XIpuaddy 315 b Modified functions The following are the functions modified in the master local module Function Note for replacement When the master local module is connected in line topology stations placed after the disconnected station become data link faulty station To prevent disconnection of normal PANSAN CUPON MUNCNGN stations connect CC Link IE Field Network in star topology F Page 49 Section 5 1 1 2 Standby master function This function is not available for the master local module Data link status setting if the CPU module oo a This setting is fixed to Continue for the master local module on the master station is faulty 316 APPENDICES Appendix 7 2 Comparison between the Q series master local module and the master local modul
101. 0 000 eee 67 The D LINK LED turns off or is flashing 239 The ERR LED is flashing 240 The ERR LED turns on 000 240 The L ERR LED turns on 241 The LINK LED turns off 00 241 The MODE LED turns off or is flashing 239 The RUN LED turns off 004 239 TOKEN PASS sioner aati ee aaa 263 Transient transmission 00200 2a 117 Transient transmission cannot be performed 244 Transmission Interval Monitoring Time 91 Troubleshooting 000 ce eee eeae 235 Troubleshooting by symptom 242 Troubleshooting procedure 235 U Using link special relay SB and link special register COV ess sege tias arias S acerca ease ted ce E 221 327 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date May 2011 SH NA O80969ENG A First edition RELEVANT MANUALS TERMS Section 6 3 7 5 10 4 10 6 10 8 Appendix 3 5 3 Appendix 5 6 September 2014 SH NA O80969ENG C Partial correction Section 7 3 8 2 3 12 2 12 3 Appendix 5 2 5 3 Appendix 6 8 Japanese manual version SH 080970 C This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a res
102. 1 20 19 18 17 swor4a 48 47 ae as aa aa aa fat 40 20 26 37 06 5 34 30 swo14a 64 6a 62 6t eo se 58 57 e 56 54 53 52 51 50 40 sworaleo e 7e 77 7e 78 7a 78172171 70 68 67 66 65 swo14s 96 95 ea To Toz Tor eo Teo 0 a7 eo a5 ee fes e2 e1 swo146f1 alr 1091810711050 109102101100 99 98 97 sworar hannenes Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOAO0 to SWO0A 7 APPENDICES Availability Master station Local safety station station O O 299 S17 MS 19 S 69 Jeloeds yu y X pu ddy Availability Master Number Description station Local safety station station Stores the station number that has received an error frame from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PORT2 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of the own station s PORT2 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of the own station s PORT2 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swo1so 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 oe PORT2 error frame SW0
103. 137 PORT2 error frame status present PORT2 error frame PORT2 error frame reception status master station status master PORT2 error frame reception status master station SW0140 to PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0147 PORT1 error frame detection each station PORT1 error frame detection master PORT1 error frame detection master station SW0150 to PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0157 PORT2 error frame detection each station PORT2 error frame detection master PORT2 error frame detection master station CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING b Checking the line status own station 1 If there is a line error in own station one of SBO06A to SBOOG6F is turned on 2 Line status can be checked by SW0064 and SW0066 to SWOOGB SBOO6A Connection status own station SBO06B Actual link scan time lower 1 word SBO06C Actual link scan time upper 1 word SB006D PORT1 line error occurrence rate max SBOO6E PORT line error occurrence rate present SBOO6F PORT2 line error occurrence rate max SWO006B PORT2 line error occurrence rate present 4 Detecting cable disconnections Cable disconnection is detected by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be detected through link special relays SB and link special registers SW lt gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 1 Ifa cable is disconnected baton pass error causes Baton pass status own station SB0047 to turn on
104. 151 O detection each station SW0152 A swo153 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo154 8o 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 swo155 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Swo156 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swo1s7 fraoftr9fstaira7jrte t tir 14 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO00A7 Stores the parameter status for each station 0 No parameter error 1 Parameter error found b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bt bO T elialalsleal tol slalelalets i slala soos at fs rasa as ai ao seals tas anc aba oa swo173 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 wa eI COCCI eee Parameter error status SW0175 96 95 e420 221 20 e0 ae 27 26 e524 fea 2 or j each station SW0176 112 114 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 eee a n Swo177 EEEE E cur Each number in the table a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This i
105. 2 Connection between PORT1s or PORT2s Connection between PORT1 and PORT2 LER LER LER LER P1 P4 f ea P4 sil fe P1 LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LER L ER L ER mER mER x a P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 l LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK QS0J71GF11 T2 QS0J71GF11 T2 QS0J71GF11 T2 LJ LI C_J QS0J71GF11 T2 QS0J71GF11 T2 QS0J71GF11 T2 b Disconnecting the cable 1 Power off the system 2 Press the latch down and unplug the Ethernet cable BuIM 9 65 66 2 Precautions This section describes wiring precautions a Handling e Place the Ethernet cable in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact e Do not touch the core of the cable side or module side connector and protect it from dirt or dust If oil from your hand dirt or dust is attached to the core it can increase transmission loss arising a problem in data link e Check the following e Is a
106. 248p If the above error occurs and the instruction fails execute the instruction again Specify the network No of the target station Target station s eis i 1 to 239 S1 4 1 to 239 Network No User network No 254 254 Specify this when 254 is set for Jn UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 191 01 U00 jqewweboId 94 O gq Hu FLIMM dD d e 9 04 177 Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by S1 5 S1 6 S1 7 S1 8 S1 9 S1 10 178 Target station number Specify the target station number 1 Station number specification Master station 125 7D Local station intelligent device station 1 to 120 To increase the reliability of data it is recommended to execute the instruction with the execution type in S1 0 set to 1 With arrival confirmation Group specification The target station is on a network other than CC Link IE Field Network 814 to AOp All stations in Group No 1 to No 32 It can be set when the execution type set for S1 0 is 0 Without arrival confirmation Group No 1 81H Group No 2 82H 125 7Dy Group No 32 AOH 1 to 120 814 to AOH FFy User All stations specification FF All stations on the target station s network No excluding the own station It can be set when the execution type set for S1 0 is 0 Without arrival confirmation When using the group specification or all stations specification e Specify 00004 or O3FF for the target stat
107. 268 0 0 sseuppe Aow aw Jang ease 9909p YUT L Z xIpueddy 267 6 Link special register SW buffer memory address 18464 to 18975 4820 to 4A1F1 This buffer memory stores the SW value b15 b144 b13 b412 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 18464 4820H 18465 4821H SWO SW1 268 APPENDICES Appendix 2 2 RX offset size information buffer memory address 19456 to 19695 4C00 to 4CEF This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RX for each station 1e4s644c00 1845744001 1e4s6 4c024 19459 4C03H Station No 2 Size in units of words j9t4Cee 19695 4CEFh Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station No can be calculated using the following formula e Offset buffer memory address 19456 station No 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19457 station No 1 x 2 Appendix 2 3 RY offset size information buffer memory address 19712 to 19951 4D00 to 4DEF This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RY for each station 19713 4D01H Station No 1 Size in units of words 19714 19715 4D03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 19950 4DEEH 19951 4DEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words 4D02x Station No 2 Offset The offset and size buffer memory address for each station No can be calculated using the following formula e Offset buffer mem
108. 4 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access 16 bit binary Start I O number of the master local module of the own station at 00 to 3E Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in 3 digits cer Start device of the own station where control data is stored L gt Page 176 Section 10 6 1 a Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored L gt Page 179 Section 10 6 1 b Device name S1 S2 Start device of the target station where data is to be written D1 A continuous area for with the write data length is required L gt Page 179 Section 10 6 1 c Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon System D2 completion of the instruction Bit D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails 175 UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 191 01 U00 jqewweboId 94 oO gd BunuM FLIMM dD d e 9 04 a Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by b15 to b7 to bO Pp 0 0 LD 1 Execution type bit 0 0 Without arrival confirmation e When the target station is on the same network The process is completed when data is sent from the own station source station e When the target station is on another network The process is completed when data arrives at the relay station on the same network source station station Execution abnorm S1 0 User al end type 1 With arrival confirmation The process is comp
109. 49 Error code D216 to D2174 D2184 D2194 D21Ay D21By to D21Cy D21Dy D21E D21Fy D220 D222 D2234 D22E Action Transient data command error Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect number of read write Correct the number of read write device data at the request source and retry transient data the operation Transient data attribute code error Correct the attribute code at the request source and retry the operation Transient data access code error Correct the access code at the request source and retry the operation e Abnormal transient data were issued from the CPU module Transient data request error e Replace the CPU module and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A cable test cannot be executed for a different network Correct Testing Station Setting and execute the cable test again Network No error in transient Transient data that cannot be sent to a different network were received transmission Correct the network number or the target station number at the request source and retry the operation e A communication test cannot be executed on a sending relay station Correct the Target Station setting and execute the communication test Target station No error in transient again transmission e Transient data of the application type that cannot be executed on the
110. 4F amp ____ Siinteligent Device Station w 0050 O05F PEI Intelligent Device Station 16 0060 006F Set the largest end number in all stations to multiples of 32 local Station BQ 1070 00sF 1 by changing the number of cyclic assignment points or adding the reserved station e After change ate dec inna sta era Number of PLCs Station Type Points Stat End O fias O eaa ooj oF mn ae A o 3 __ fineer Devicesin gt 16 030 o03F O 5 irteligent Device Statin __ 46 0060 006 E e f lirteligent Device Statin 16 oeo one e Before change Number of PLCs Station Type OO MEC 2 2 iretigent Device saion v 0020 F E a f fieren Device Staion 16 0030 o03F O Alinietigent Device Station Jefe 0040 _o04F 5 Sinietigent Device Statin Jf 0050 O05 5 6 netigent Device Statin v 16 0060 o06F kcal Statin fs 0070 _ 008 e After change meae ee eee Number of PLCs Station Type Points Stat End Tt bccatstation O a 0000 or D inicion Device Staton 6 0020 F Reduce the largest end number in all stations to 7F 4 or less i inteligent Device Station 716 0030 003F Oe inteligent Device Station 776 0040 004F TOS Inteligent Device Station 7776 0050 _005F BE linteligent Device Station 16 0060 _006F Ce boat Station HB 0070 007F 320 APPENDICES Appendix 9 Checking the Serial Number and Function Version The serial
111. 5 Clock data of abnormal end EPIN a 1 15 Setting is not required because it is set by the Error detected station s network system S1 16 D286 No S1 17 D287 Error detected station number e Request data S2 0 D290 Request type 0001 clock data read S2 1 D291 Sub request type 00024 clock data read CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d Program example The following program is written to the safety CPU module of station No 0 M130 MOV H91 D270 MOV K2 D272 MOV HO D273 MOV KI D274 Control data setting for REQ instruction MOV K2 D275 MOV KO D276 MOV KO D278 MOV K2 D279 MOV HI D290 Request data setting for REQ instruction MOV H2 D291 M131 SB47 SW AO 1 MOV K5 D277 JP REQ J1 D270 D290 D300 M135 Execution of REQ instruction M135 M136 Processing program upon completion M136 ee a ee cS Processing program upon failure d eyeq Y20109 BunumM buipeoy O3Y d9 dr 804 205 5 Program example Writing clock data The following program is for writing clock data 8 30 00 in all stations of network No 1 when M141 is turned on e System configuration example Station No 1 Station No 2 CPU module Network module Clock data write 8 30 00 CPU module Network module REQ request source Own station Safety CPU Master local module module Network No 1 REQ request target Target station CPU module Network module Target station Clock da
112. 8 6 Loopback Function This function disconnects the station in which an error has occurred from the network and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally All stations after the faulty station are disconnected in line topology By using the loopback function with ring topology data link continues with the stations that are operating normally To use this function configure the network in ring topology and select Use under Loopback Function Setting in the Network Parameter window for the master station Ring topology If a fault occurs the system will EN gt loopback data continuing data link PETES CELLELEEET Deen Line topology Stations after the faulty station are disconnected EE e uoloun 4 yoeqdoo 9g 121 1 Setting procedure 1 Configure the network in ring topology 2 Select Use under Loopback Function Setting in the network configuration setting for the master station safety station Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt button gt _ Sueslneriay Seno button CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting f Asynchronous Constant Scan ms 1 to 200 C Synchronous Select the checkbox Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Block Data Assurance
113. 85 Orto AATF H ie atc ak ha Oe wed SA ede bes 266 Diagnostic Items 0 00000 ee eee 124 Link device assignment 103 UNK NEE i wis tate dh ee bares ARE ot s at eh cee cee 31 Link refresh 00 000 ee eee eee eee 16 104 Link refresh time 20000 eeee 302 Link scantime 000 ee eee 16 303 Link special register SW list 286 Link special relay SB 00000 16 Link special relay SB list 213 Link start stop oonan 138 List of buffer memory addresses 42 List of I O signals 2 0 0 00 0000 eee eee 40 BS OA Sh op Goce si aoiak e A estig ths ahaa ae ae tis eat a ah 263 Local stations siian sie kad wise ee hdl 16 Looptest ius erruna eine aes oes oe 67 Loopback function aaa eee eee 36 Loopback Function Setting 83 MO ERR se oe eck Sea shes eas Behe ew ee See 263 Manual page organization 0 14 MASTER ere ier esa a Boe SA ees ain bee cut acme SS 263 WaSter stalone chs tna oa oa tind ae ee See 16 Master local module 000 15 22 Maximum link points per network 33 Maximum number of networks 0 33 Maximum number of safety connections per station Maximum number of send points per station 33 313 Maximum station to station distance maximum cable ENGI ube ae wetted oats eae tilt Ae Woes 66 MODE ou ines her G es oar 4 ee te r 263
114. ALL OFF Stores the hardware test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress ON Completed If completed the completion status can be checked by Hardware test normal abnormal end SB0091 Master station safety station APPENDICES Availability Local station 279 ysI7 GS ejay jeloeds yu xIpueddy Number SB0091 SB0092 SB0093 SB0094 SB0095 SBOO9A SBOOAO 280 Hardware test normal abnormal end Self loopback test completion status Self loopback test normal abnormal end Loop test completion status Loop test normal abnormal end Loop test request accept status Baton pass status each station Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the hardware test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion ON Abnormal completion O Condition e This is enabled when Hardware test completion status SBO090 is on Stores the self loopback test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress ON Completed O If completed the completion status can be checked by Self loopback test normal abnormal end SB0093 Stores the self loopback test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion ON Abnormal completion 0 Condition e This is enabled when Self loopback test completion status SBO092 is on Stores the loop test completion status OFF Not execut
115. ANIZATION ie crest at erences aaah Gn aienc Nie Une oe uae oie Eee Nos 14 NIGER ES Wa E ae se ae Gian acral anche ety ese a meh E RR a eed Go Ree ERG A Re ete ge a ste Med i 15 ed A HN A Goa UC E ine E Meer ie E ns 7 Seen Pe NENT E EA Pan yy APT EAL CENT GREAT etre dee ar 18 CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 19 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network 2 0 00000000 ccc ee ee ee eee ee ees 19 1 2 Master Local Modules ununun pun bathed es keu ee aed ed wae hak pan abed aacee ie ds 22 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 30 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 33 31 General SpeciiCalions kiana ened ax oaks casa ad dhe eet see teke eee oes 33 3 2 Performance Specifications 0 0 20 0 0 cee eee eens 33 S3 PUNCHOM Listsc lt 4 2 h c 2 nbd te tent bb hpi Bd i ee eke ee hes REE LES ble rd 35 3 3 1 Using the master local module as a master station safety station 35 3 3 2 Using the master local module as a local station 2 0 0 0 0c eee 38 34 List or lO Signals secsi ek r nea e te ba a madaees aeate bao 40 3 5 List of Buffer Memory Addresses 1 0 0 0 te cee eee ees 42 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 45 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 4 5 1 CC Link IE Field Network Configuration 0 0 0 ccc ees 47 5 1 1 Single network system 1 0 ee eee eee ees 47 Slee WUllaneIWOR SYStenls dani02 oe mnatoayeaudet oa bt dada yest ad bi dabmarame amen 55 5 2 Network Components 22 5443 2cdeii ect eh co eieves lt beh ad bedev
116. Bay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy Availability Master Number Description station Local safety station station Stores the continuation error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Continuation error b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 sonoj pisla 13 elole elr Jels eT Sw0111 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 swo1 12 48 47 46 45 48 45 4241 403038 37 30 35 a swo113 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo114 0 79 76 77 76 75 78 75 72 71 70 69 68 67 65 6s eee Operation status each SW0115 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 to station 2 swo1 fra friorosoe0708 108 04 03 02f0 00 99 98 97 o me swott7 fr2ofrt9f119frt7 rt6f145 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the station number receiving an error frame on the transmission path at each station s PORT 1 0 A line error is not occurring on the transmission path of each station s PORT1 1 A line error is occurring on the transmission path of
117. CPU mode is set to the test mode output data of safety communication when the safety CPU module is on the STOP status _ gt Page 115 Section 8 2 6 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 2 Error log registration function Under the following occasions error information can be registered to a safety CPU module as an error log e When a moderate error an error that stops input output has occurred on a safety station e When a communication error has occurred between safety stations during safety communication The error log is held even if the power is turned off 1 When a moderate error has occurred on a safety station When a moderate error is detected on a safety station the error information is registered to the safety CPU module on the station The other safety station detects the error as a communication error and registers the error information on the safety CPU module on the station Communication error detected A master local module on the error station A master local module on the communication target station detects the communication 1o a Falai pie heise error and transfers error information to the tg ees ety CPU module Error information safety CPU module Error information is is registered as an error log registered as an error log Moderate error detected Moderate error 2 When a communication error has occurred between safety stations
118. CTIONS Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by The valid or invalid status of data after S1 12 is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 11 Clock set flag S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Clock data of abnormal end is stored in BCD format Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed S1 12 to Clock data of bO Syst S1 15 abnormal end Year 00H to 99H last 2 digits ee Year 00H to 99H first 2 digits OOH Sun to O6H Sat When the target station is QnACPU O00 is stored in the year the first two digits of the year The network No of the station in which an error was detected is stored Error detected Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in S1 16 station s network the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in No S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network No The station number of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in E
119. Description station Local safety station station Turns on when System link start request accept status SBO054 turns on and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SB0002 is off System link start SB0055 ON Start completed SB0002 is on completion status Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when a cyclic transmission stop request by System link stop SB0003 is accepted l OFF Not accepted SB0003 is off System link stop SB0056 ON Stop accepted SB0003 is on request accept status Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when System link stop accept status SB0056 turns on and cyclic transmission stop is completed i OFF Stop not completed SB0003 is off System link stop SB0057 ON Stop completed SB0003 is on completion status Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Turns on when Temporary error invalid request SB0010 is accepted Temporary error invalid Turns on when Temporary error invalid request accept status SB0058 Temporary error invalid ae is turned on and the temporary error invalid processing is completed SB0058 OFF Not accepted SB0010 is off O request accept status ON Invalid accepted SB0010 is on gt O O S SB0059 setting completion Q i j OFF Not completed O x status w ON Comple
120. Diagnostics gt System monitor 2 Select a module to be checked under Installed status and click the Module s Detailed Information button System Monitor Installed status r Base Base Module Main base FTrrriil tl is EEE eee Parameter status r Mode I 0 Acres o 20 40 60 ITE E System moniter Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Status A Module system error E Module error O Module warning sisi Detailed inf of power supply E Module change Stop monitor Close Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QS0J71GF11 T2 Product information 130410000000000 4 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 170 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status a Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status Error Display r r Display format No ErorCode Present Eror D814 tesent Error ripe a7 Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Error contents Disposal J Contents Disposal H W Information JO IUON Wa3 SA S Aq sn amp s jnpoy jeo07T Ja SeyWy 34 BuryosyuD 9 Z 261 Display format H W LED Information 262 The H W Information wind
121. E Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Monitor Status Select Module Module 1fNetwork No 1 Station No 1fError Station Monitoring Seng pore Stop Monitor Network Status i Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link The Number of Set In Parameter Connected 2 Scan Time 1 mS stations Error Occurs 1 Legends Connected Station MasterSafety 0 Divergence i eo LocalS afety 1 x LocalS afety 2 Operation Test Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Communication Test Check the transient communication rounte From the connected taion No1 Eno l station to the destination station Mode Online Cable Test Check the cable status between the test station and Cable Testes equipment connected to the test station port MAC Address mm irs Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Module Error Information Confirmation Set D Network Event History Check the event histories occurred on network Reserved Station Enable the reserved station Also check the station No set as Function Enable the reserved station from the list Temporary Error Invalid Station Temporary error invalid station setting restore Also check Setting Restore the station No set as temporarily ignored station From the list Selected Station Operation F Start the system monitor in the selected station and check reem Monon i the selected station PLC status Remote Operation
122. E Field Network diagnostics gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action gt Page 246 Section 12 5 UOe S JOYJOUY UO Ja O UOD sjqewwesbos4 94 Woy eyeq Bulpesy GVAN dO de v OL 165 4 Program example The following program is for reading data of D250 to D254 of station No 4 target station into D700 to D704 of station No 0 own station when M101 is turned on a System configuration example Station No 0 Station No 4 READ instruction Safety CPU module Master local READ instruction Safety CPU module Master local request source request target module Own station Target station Network No 1 b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWOO0A0 3 Baton pass status each station of station No 4 e Devices used by the user Device Description Device Description D200 to D217 Control data D700 to D704 Read data storage device station No 0 M100 Control data setting command M101 Start contact M105 Completion device M106 Completion status indication device c READ instruction setting The setting of READ instruction control data is as follows Device te
123. Field diagnostics T E Invalid Stati Click the ssttinajnestore button in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window The Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore window opens In Error Invalid Station List click the number of the station for which temporary error invalid station setting is to be configured The station number and the background turn red and yellow respectively Ex Only stations for which temporary error invalid station setting has not been configured can be selected displayed in white Clicking the button will temporarily set the station as an error invalid station CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Point Station for which temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured When reservation for a slave station is temporarily cancelled temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured for the station Using an error invalid station in line topology In the following cases even if a data link error occurs in a station set as an error invalid station the station is not detected as a data link faulty station However stations subsequent to the disconnected station are detected as a data link faulty station Error invalid station Master station safety station Not a data link faulty station Station No 0 Data link faulty stations i pa Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect temporary erro
124. Host PLC type 105001 Target memory Program memory Device memory Title File selection Device data Program Common Local Param Prog Select all Cancel all selections Ja ram FE Structure Program memory Device memory PLC Connection Network Ne a pa Program Mj MAIN kail Device comment C MAIN Ei Parameter M PLC Network Remote r Related functions Transfer setup Remnte nneratinn lt 1 STOP RESET RUN or powering off gt on Communication Test Communication Test Contents Connected Station Own m Target Station 5 Communication Data Setting Network No 1 Network No 2 Data Length 100 Byte Outward Station No 0 Station No 2 Communication Count 1 Times Inward Communication Monitoring Time 5 Second 4 Execute Test Check the transient communication rounte From the connected station to the destination station Communication Test Result Communication Test 6 Communication Test Contents Connected Station Own 4 Network No m Target Station Communication Data Setting _ Mz BE 1 onai Network No n Station No Inward Data Length 100 Byte 1 Times Communication Monitoring Time 5 Second Station No Communication Count Execute Test Check the transient communication rounte from the connected station to the destination station Communication Test Result Connected Station Own 4
125. Network diagnostics of the programming tool is incorrect Close the CC IE Field Diagnostics D7834 to D7844 Transient data request error window and request it again e Check the read request data at the request station and retry the operation The maximum number of writes to the flash ROM is exceeded Replace the D7854 Flash ROM failure master local module The flash ROM may be faulty Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a D7864 Flash ROM failure failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D8004 Network module failure l i e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable ISI OPO JOU G Z4 distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D803 to D8054 Network module failure J f e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative i e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the opera
126. PU READ e LCPU SREAD Safety CPU module Master local module Master local module Safety CPU module QnACPU Command Word device e Intelligent device H READ station Word device Writes data in the device of another station s programmable controller In For the SWRITE instruction when data write is completed the other station s Network device is turned on It can be confirmed that data was written to the other e CC Link IE QCPU station by the SWRITE instruction Controller WRITE Network LCPU e QnACP SWRITE Safety CPU module Master local module Network module CPU module e MELSECNET H a 2 isaac e MELSECNET 10 EN device Command l Ethernet Station HHuRITEH y Channel 2 Reads write clock data from to a programmable controller on another station e QSCPU D e QCPU S Safety CPU module Master local module Network module CPU module o LCPU D REQ clock data Q Command QnACPU D HH REQ H Ethernet adapter T module A o gt n 1 Clock data cannot be written to a safety CPU module by the REQ instruction 153 b Transient transmission range of the link dedicated instruction e Single network system It is possible to communicate with all stations on the network e Multiple network system Communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart by setting routing parameters L gt Page 92 Section 7 7 Relay station 1 Relay station 2 Relay station 3 Safety a CPU CPU Module module mo
127. PU module on the master station safety station by safety data transfer 97 uoloun y uonedlunwlwop Ayayes L8 suolje s jes UM uoneoiunwwon 1 9 98 2 Setting method Assign devices to be used for safety communication in the safety communication setting gt Page 90 Section 7 6 Devices used for safety communication are highlighted in yellow or green in ladder programs on GX Developer LU GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Safety Programmable Controller The following figure is an example of a ladder program with a device highlighted in yellow HT 400 cM 42 1 l E E Highlighted in yellow MO im mame Mle Point If an error occurs in safety communication safety data from a station with an error is cleared A safety connection can be established only while baton bass is performed after configuring the safety communication setting of both stations sending side and receiving side Note that stations not set to the network configuration setting of the master station and reserved stations cannot establish a safety connection Check whether a safety connection is established or not at special registers SD1420 to SD1427 Safety refresh communication status of each safety station and a special relay SM1421 Safety refresh communication status of safety master station LJ QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals The following data can be held only when the safety
128. RITE Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 ENDr 0 END 0 END l ON l l l l l L l l l Start contact OFF ore l l I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Completion device ON Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF OFF Completion status I I I I I I I I I I I I I l l indication device ON Device of D2 1 OFF OFF 1scan Write data storage device l Device specified in S2 3000 Ge Completion status Device of S1 1 pK i Erorcode Va r EER et E E E ee eee E ee ee ee a oe ee a ee ee R ee ee eee peg ee ee ee ee ee ee se a E a ee N E E a om l l l Master local module i l Channel 1 EEEN ee sc fa ders me ce es ee ee ee eee ee J Target station error 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Developer Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action lt _ gt Page 246 Section 12 5 UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 19 01 U00 jqewweboId 24 0 geq HuNWAA FLINMS dOD d e Z OL 191 4 Program example 192 Compared to the WRITE instruction program example the SWRITE instruction program example has a different section where the
129. RITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SWRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the SWRITE instruction fails UOIE1S JOUJOUY UO 19 01 U00 jqewweboId 24 0 geq Hu FLINMS dOD d e Z OL 189 d SWRITE instruction execution timing e When completed i eB SB SS SS l l l l l SWRITE l l l l l l l 1 Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END l l ION l l Start contact OFF ALOFF i l l l l l ON l Completion device y Own station CPU Device specified in D2 QFF ad OFF i l l i Completion status s j egan Indication device l l Device of D2 1 OFF i l l l l Write data storage device Device specified in S2 3000 C d i l i i r E E E E E ee eg ee fee See E E R ee EE ER ere e E ee eee eee ee ee oe eee E E ey ees E ees et ees E E eee pe ee ee ee E a ea ee on R E a a a a a 1 i Master local module i l Channel 1 i l l l l l Network module l Sequence scan 0 3000 Target station CPU Device specified in D1 Write notification device ON Device specified in D3 OFF loFF I l _ eee eee l l l l l l Write data storage device l l l l l l l 190 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e When failed SW
130. S CavleSi out tate aeaaea due Died A Bod 56 General specifications o oo oaaao naaa 33 Canceling Restoring reserved station setting 142 GX Developer reitir co ares ob Ae pas 58 Cascade connection 0 50 GX WORKS 2 i dear heard ele Bs sone dot ober a dv a Red 15 58 CC Link IE Field Network 15 19 CC Link IE Field Network configuration 47 H CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 124 CC Link Safety master module 15 Handling ooa aaua anana a auena annona 66 Checking for failure of any other than the master local EEE EE OE Soka 60 module R L E A A a 237 Head mod le se a civi es ook oa See eee 15 Checking for failure of the master local module 238 EE O cece de cccecacase tn O 57 Checking on the rating plate 321 Checking the LEDs 0000005 239 Checking the serial number and function version 321 Communication Example of when Safety Stations and a a a a a a a Bee Standard Sta onmare Used eaire ai 211 Input and output status settings in case of failure 113 Communealon e TST IGS een aane aa aa air aa 245 Installation ee EREEREER 59 Communication Target Station No 91 Installation and wiring s s ee eee eee ee 59 E T foc rrecoce Bocce wleconcotececncasedeocrt ete wes 75 Intelligent device station 0005 16 Communication with different networks 118 Interlock program bao aig ae eS par a afa
131. STOP and RESET operations can be executed from GX Developer to the station selected in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window The displayed window varies depending on the station selected For the operations with a module other than a master local module selected refer to the manual for the module used Remote operation Connection target information 2 a Connection interface USB lt gt PLC module a Station no Host PLC type jason Target PLC PLC status RUN Safety CPU operation mode Test mode Operation 3 cco E c Operation during RUN 4 a Do not clear v Save v Device memory Signal flow Close Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics Select the module where the remote operations are performed in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Click the Rente operation button in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Or right click a module icon in Network Status and click Remote Operation The Remote operation window will open 5 Select a remote operation for the safety CPU roo module under Operation and Operation during Plc RUN z RUN p fi If MI rl L Item Description Operation during RUN RUN i STOP Select a remote operation for the safety CPU Device memory Do not clear he module Reset Signal flow Save Device memory Si
132. SW Click the button The execution status of cyclic transmission can be checked in Link Status When the safety CPU module is reset or the system is powered off and on Even if cyclic transmission was stopped by link stop it will be restarted by resetting the safety CPU module or powering off and on the system Ifthe link stop is executed to an error invalid station or temporary error invalid station Note that the station is displayed as a station during data link in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window even after data link has been stopped Check the data link status in Data link status own station SB0049 If SB0049 is on data link is stopped Station where link start cannot be performed Link start cannot be performed in the following cases e Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error e Station where link was stopped by a command from another station e Station where link was stopped by link special relay SB or link special register SW d Selecting Forced Link Start will start the link Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped with link special relay SB and link special register SW lt _ gt Page 221 Section 11 3 139 dojs uels yul 76 9 5 Network Event History The history of events occurred in the own station and in the network can be displayed When the master station safety station is the target module event history of the entire network
133. Select Diagnostics Destination Monitor Status Select Module Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module Station A Maii nea PRETE Network Status Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station Set In Parameter 2 Connected 2 0 Connected Station Station No 1 Station No 2 co j Stop Monitor Legend Scan Time 1 mS Errors Detected Operation Test i Selected Station Communication Status Monitor icati Check the transient communication route from the connected z Silla cna Teti station to the destination station Station No 0 No Error Mode Online Normal Mode Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and MAC Address iiij the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log Reserved Station view reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations Enable Disable View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Ignore Station Errors ignore station errors Selected Station Operation System Monitor CPU status of the selected station can be checked by starting system monitor of the selected station Remote Operation Change the operation state run reset stop etc of the selected station f amp A or is displayed in Network Status an error has
134. Start the selected station remote operation and change PLC status for the selected station Item Description Displays the master local module being diagnosed Select Select a station to be diagnosed If an error occurs in the selected station Error is displayed Diagnostics after the station number EEE Select Station DENS I l i w pai Destination A station can also be selected by clicking the module icon displayed in Network Status In Select Station modules not displayed in Network Status can also be selected Monitor button Starts monitoring of CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Status button Stops monitoring of CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 130 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Item Description Displays the meaning of icons displayed in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Legends Station Type DEN Master Station Local Station s a a Station Intelligent Device Station Ethernet Adaptor Unit ceuni Background Color For Station Type Light Blue Reserved Station Yellow Temporary Error Invalid Station Grange Reserved Station Function Disable Grey Error Invalid Station Legends button Station Status Error Station Stop data link E By Disconnected Station Error Station Continuing data link Select Station Station With No Station No Error Station Station that is detected illegal loop connection Cable Status 20h Error Total Slave Statio
135. TED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a WRITE instruction overview The instruction writes data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the own station start device S2 into the target station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the writing to devices of the target station is completed the completion device D2 turns on Own station Target station Safety CPU module Master local module CPU module Network module S2 D1 Channel 1 n m b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following K gt Page 152 Section 10 1 1 UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 191 01 U00 jqewweboId 94 O ged HuNWMA FLIMM dD d 9 04 181 c Checking the execution status of the WRITE instruction The execution status completion or error of the WRITE instruction can be checked using the following device specified by the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the WRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned ON in the END processing of the scan after completion of the WRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the WRITE instruction fails d WRITE instruction execution timing e When completed l I l I l WRITE I l l i l
136. Target station s e CPU No 1 multiple CPU system 03D0 to 03D3 fies eae a aA eee 03E3y CPU No 4 multiple CPU system O3FFy Control CPU When the instruction is executed by specifying a control system CPU 03D0 or standby system CPU 03D1 if system switching occurs in the target station the instruction may fail CPU module error code 4244y 4248p If the above error occurs and the instruction fails execute the instruction again Taraet station s Specify the network No of the target station 1 to 239 S1 4 7 me 1 to 239 Network No oy User network No 254 Specify this when 254 is set for Jn Specify the target station number l 125 7Dy Master station 125 7Dy Target station S1 5 User number oe l 1 to 120 Local station intelligent device station 1 to 120 C a e During instruction execution For the case where the instruction is not completed within the MEAE TOES be Oto 15 User Number of monitoring time specified by S1 8 specify the number of a resends times the instruction is resent When the instruction is completed System The number of resends result is stored Specify the monitoring time until instruction completion pa If the instruction is not completed within the specified time the Arrival monitoring or z S1 8 instruction is resent for the number of resends specified by S1 7 0 to 32767 User UOe S JOYJOUY UO 19 04 U00 jqewweboId 94 wo eyeq Bulpesy
137. U User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection c Mounting to a MELSECNET H remote I O station The master local module cannot be mounted to any MELSECNET H remote I O stations Mount the module on a safety base unit on which a safety CPU module is mounted 2 Applicable programming tool GX Developer is required for setting and diagnosing master local modules GX Works2 cannot be used Software Version GX Developer Version 8 98C or later 3 Module replacement Replacing the module before the following time elapses is recommended Module Replacement time Master local module 10 years 08 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes the installation and wiring of a master local module 6 1 Installation This section describes the installation of a master local module 1 Handling precautions The following is a list of precautions for handling the master local module e Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module case since it is made from resin Doing so may cause failure e Do not remove the printed circuit board of the module from the case Doing so may cause failure e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction e A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not
138. U module device of the master station turning on or off e The time between data input to the intelligent device station and the data being stored in the CPU module device of the master station Calculation Block Data Assurance per Station No Block Data Assurance per Station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x 1 LS x n1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 1 Rio Maximum ete SM x 1 LS x n1 1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 2 Rio SM x 1 LS x 2 Rio SM x 1 LS x 2 Rio SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n1 SM LS Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer Rio Intelligent device station processing time Manual for the intelligent device station used e Master station RY RWw gt Intelligent device station output The following time is shown e The time between the CPU module device of the master station turning on or off and the output of the intelligent device station being turning on or off e The time between data set to the CPU module device of the master station and the data output to the intelligent device station Normal value SM x n2 LS x 1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 1 Rio SM x 1 LS x 1 Rio laa SM x n2 LS x 2 Rio SM x n2 LS x 1 Rio SM x 2 LS x 2 Rio SM x n2 LS x 1 Rio SM Master station sequence scan time
139. User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Systems on other networks can be tested or monitored Device Y1000 Monitor format Bit amp Wwod Display 16bit integer Value DEC C Bit C 32bit integer C HEX C Word C Real number single precision C Real number double precision ASCII character 2 tE EDC 142 Soe 7654 3210 CC Link IE Controller Network oaoao oaaoao oooo ooaooo oo00 0000 0000 00090 Network No 1 p al GX Developer ERAR E g RUE Hl T i os a Relay station CC Link IE Field Network Network No 2 LSA A TT rly Seamless access S jNpPOW E207 9SEN Z 2 5 Replacing CC Link IE Field Network devices without stopping the system For star topology slave stations can be replaced without powering off the whole system Replacement 6 RAS function when a communication error occurs a During safety communication When a communication error occurs between safety stations communication is automatically disconnected in order to prevent incorrect input output from to the faulty station lt gt Page 100 Section 8 1 3 Hl Safety j i B E communication m _ _ a Local station Local station Local station safety station standard station standard station Station No 3 Station No 2 Station No 1
140. V KO D230 M111 MOV K10 D750 MOV K20 D751 Stores write data in MOV K30 D752 D750 to D753 MOV K40 D753 M112 SB47 SW A0 2 MOV K5 D227 JP SWRITE J1 D220 D750 D300 M115 M117 Execution of utie i E E EEE EAE EE E EEEE SWRITE instruction M116 d Ba e Program example in SWRITE instruction request destination station No 3 M117 BMOV D300 D500 K4 UOI E S 134 0Uy UO 19 01 U00 jqewweboId 24 0 geq HuNWAA FLINMS dOD d e Z OL 193 10 8 JP GPREQ Reading Writing Clock Data This instruction reads and writes the clock data of the programmable controller on another station Start contact JPREQ jE Start contact GPREQ f Available devices Setting data Internal device System user Others ee Wot o o gt _ s q gt o oe a f gt 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access Jn 16 bit binary Start I O number of the master local module of own station i 00 to 3Ep Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in 3 digits Start device of the own station where control data is stored meee L gt Page 195 Section 10 8 1 a Start device of the own station where receive data is stored S2 Device name _ Page 198 Section 10 8 1 b Start device of the own station where response data is stored L gt Page 199 S
141. W SW W Default Blank Transfer SB ee Transfer g atl SN LSS Jo1FFH i 0000H Device ee Device 0000H 3 a ae name name PLC side Within device range of O1FFH LS SW JO1FFH _ safety CPU module ae Default Blank Start End eden Set bit devices in increments of 16 points and word devices in increments of 4 points _ Safety CPU module Select link refresh ranges of RX RY RWr and RWw Link refresh e Link side RX RY RWr RWw ranges can be set up to 8 Page 104 Section 8 2 2 e PLC side When RX is set to Link Side X M B D W When RY is set to Link Side Dev name m ek e R Y M B T C ST D W l Transfer2 epyy v 256 1000 10FF Transfer3 epyw 256 0000 OFF on Transfer tw moo Fe When RWr is set to Link Side x v V M B D W 2 aD n When RWw is set to Link Side A M B T C ST D W 7 Default Blank n Transfer 1 Device Ee Device 4 to 8 name e i name RY i Y Transfer e Link side pa mmm Sey Device Oto 3FFFy for RX RY RWr f mW Oto 1FFFy for RWr RWw Transfer e PLC side Within device range of safety CPU module Default Blank Start End Points 3 Set bit devices in increments of 16 points and word devices in increments of 4 points Master local module Safety CPU module Default button Reset refresh parameters to default 8 2 Checking method
142. X RY Setting Half of the points entered in this field will be reflected to the Points of o m x I Identical Point Assignment 64 Point XN RWw RWr Setting 2 Precautions When Synchronous is set under Link Scan Mode Setting of Supplementary Setting observe the following Setting range e Start station 1 to the end slave station number e End station Number set to Start station to the end slave station number e Start No Same values set in RX RY Setting and RWw RWr Setting e Total points assigned Same values set in RX RY Setting and RWw RWr Setting Default Blank e Change the program or the system configuration so that the sequence scan time of the safety CPU module may be within 200ms Failure to do so may cause disconnection of slave stations e Set the sequence scan time of safety CPU modules on local stations safety stations so that it may be longer than or equal to the link scan time If the sequence scan time is shorter than the link scan time an error occurs in safety communication To avoid this set the constant scan time of the safety CPU modules on the local stations safety stations For how to calculate link scan time refer to lt gt Page 303 Appendix 5 2 For how to set the constant scan time of a safety CPU module refer to the following QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 3 Setting example For s
143. X and Y when X Y cannot be used as an interlock device a Example of interlock using X and Y An example of sending data in WO to W3 of the master station safety station station No 0 to W600 to W603 of the local station station No 1 is shown below X1000 and Y1000 are used for a handshake to the safety CPU modules of RX and RY Master station safety station Station No 0 Local station Station No 1 Zz Sending station Program Master local module Master local module Master station safety station Station No 0 f Receiving station Sending station MO Y1000 X1000 BMOV DO wo K4 SET Y1000 X1000 RST Y1000 Local station Station No 1 Receiving station co Oo BMOV w600 DO K4 NN w O pe SET Y1000 n 2 20 S3 RST Y1000 50 O J D A o 3 Data flow 2 O Send Safety CPU Master station Local Safety CPU Sg request module safety station station module X1000 Sd Send data W Y1000 RYO RYO Y1000 E Receive data W D B muny pN F Q SET Y1000 x D Q Z Sak P See X1000 RXO WY RX0 X1000 Je JES ip a 0 B RWw0 RWwO FF WO LI x g is du Cyclic transmission _ ZS S W600 ri Rwro SZ Rwo W600 Link refresh quik mp E The send request turns on The contents of DO to D3 are transferred to WO to W3 Upon completion of storage in WO to W3 Y1000 at the sending station for a handshake is turned on Cyclic transmission sends RWw followed by RY and X1000 of the receiving
144. a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter error constant link scan D0184 Correct the constant link scan time time error e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D0194 to D01C Network module failure i e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D020 Network module failure 3 l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative D030 to D033H Connection failure Correct the wiring D035 Connection failure Correct the wiring e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D036 Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi represen
145. a slave station or switching hub off and on e Connecting disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub e Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to another Star topology slave station or the switching hub e Disconnecting more than nine stations or half the number of slave stations or more in the system e Changing the network topology when adding a slave station e Simultaneously powering off on systems on multiple stations e Simultaneously connecting disconnecting Ethernet cables to from multiple stations When a data link faulty station returns a data link error will occur in all the stations e Disconnecting more than nine stations or half the number of slave stations or more in Line topology ring topology the system e Changing the network topology when adding a slave station Momentary error in all the stations Insertion removal or power off power on Wa SAS YIOMIOU B HUIS L S UOHEINBYUCD MOMION PIO Al AUIT OO V S To hold the outputs as a measure when a data link error occurs configure the following settings e Master local module Set input data to be used from the faulty station KO Project data list gt gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Network Operation Setting button Note that data input by safety communication is cleared even if the above setting is configured 53 54 g Connected station numbers D
146. aYIJY d9 dr Y O time 0 10 seconds 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 seconds 161 Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by S1 9 S1 10 S1 11 S1 12 to S1 15 S1 16 S1 17 162 Read data length 1 to 960 Specify the number of words to be read From QnACPU User 1 to 480 words Clock set flag Clock data of abnormal end Error detected station s network No x1 Error detected The valid or invalid status of data after S1 12 is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated System instruction is normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Clock data of abnormal end are stored in BCD format Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed d bO Year 00H to 99H last 2 digits eye Second 00H to 59H OOH Sun to O6H Sat When the target station is QnACPU 00 is stored in the year the first two digits of the year The network No of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in System S1 0
147. aa aa aa fat 40 20 26 37 06 35 34 3a swo004 646s e261 eo so se 57 s6 55 54 59 s2 51 50 40 swo00s s0 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 62 68 67 66 65 swo00e 96 95 8 s5 92 s1 oo eo Tse 187 e6 a5 ee ea s2 er swo007 1 121141 1098107106108 1o109 10210 100 9 98 97 swoo0al haohitolriahra riehielriahis Each number in the table represents station No Specify the slave station for which the reserved station setting is to be temporary cancelled restored or the temporary error invalid station setting is to be set cancelled 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swoorol 16 15 14 13 2 14 of 8 7 6 s 4 32 1 SW0011 SW0012 swo013 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 sw0014 20 re re 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 6066 67 66 65 swo01s 36 35 e4 23 Toz st e0 e0 o6 97 a6 65 a4 les ez 61 swoore rt2 11 110109108 107 16 105 1041010210100 9 e6 97 swor neeha Each number in the table represents station No Conditions e For some stations reserved station setting cannot be temporarily cancelled restored and temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured cancelled lt gt Page 142 Section 9 6 Page 146 Section 9 7 e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the processing results of the link dedicated in
148. afety connections are established Information on errors occurred in safety stations and errors Error log registration function occurred in communications among safety stations are transferred Page 99 Section 8 1 2 to the safety CPU module and registered as error logs If an error occurs in safety communication this function cuts off the Safety station interlock function safety communication and prevents automatic resumption of the Page 100 Section 8 1 3 communication 2 Cyclic transmission as Communication by I O data in bit units is communicated between the local station and ie RX and RY other stations Page 81 Section 7 3 with other eee Communication by I O data in word units is communicated between the local station Page 103 Section 8 2 1 RWr and RWw and other stations Device and link ereket Transfer between the link device of the master local module and the Page 86 Section 7 5 device access device of the safety CPU module is performed automatically Page 104 Section 8 2 2 The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station Assurance of cyclic data integrity Page 106 Section 8 2 3 based units Input status setting for data link faulty Select whether the input data from another station where the data i Page 113 Section 8 2 5 station link error occurred is cleared or held When the safety CPU module mounted with a master local module Output status setting for CPU STOP is set to STOP
149. aion No Staion Type Pores Stat End Poms Stat End _ FY fw _ FW _RReserved EnorInveid Statin Fi iftccarstaion _ 258 0000 o0FF 266 0000 oorF eroo0 256 Tone ____ WS056 WOV2SE Po local Station 25 ooo OFF 256 0100 _O1FF x1100 256 1100 256 WE00 256 w 100 256 0200 0200 02FF 1200 256 1200 256 w700 256 w200 256 Reserved Station Select Reserved Station 2 Reserved station function disable and cancel This is used when connecting a reserved status slave station to the network For details on the reserved station function disable refer to gt Page 142 Section 9 6 Point This cannot be performed when the safety CPU operation mode is on the safety mode jqes p UOH OUNJ UOI E S PeAJOSEJ pue UOH EOyIO9ds uogezs PeAIeSeY pg 119 8 5 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function When a slave station is set as an error invalid station even if it is disconnected from the network during data link the master station will not detect it as faulty station Furthermore by the temporary error invalid station setting function a slave station can be temporarily set as an error invalid station without changing the GX Developer setting each time 1 Error invalid station setting A slave station can be set as an error invalid station in Network Configuration Setting Page 81 Section 7 3 Master station Slave station Stave station Slave station
150. annot be established Check item In Network Configuration Setting of the master station is the safety station specified as a reserved station Do the station numbers set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station match those set for corresponding safety stations Is safety connection set among safety stations that perform safety communication Is the same Open Method set to safety stations that perform safety communication Is the transmission interval monitoring time value valid Is the safety refresh monitoring time value valid Does safety station interlock status SM1700 SD1700 to SD1707 indicate interlock status Is a standard station set in Communication Target Station No in Safety Communication Setting Is Safety Data Transfer Device Setting correctly set Is any transfer target device in Safety Data Transfer Device Setting overlapped with any refresh target device of another network module Action Cancel the reserved station setting gt Page 81 Section 7 3 Correct station number s Set safety connection among safety stations that perform safety communication in Safety Communication Setting gt Page 90 Section 7 6 Set one of the safety stations Active and the other Passive L gt Page 90 Section 7 6 Correct the transmission interval monitoring time value gt Page 308 Appendix 5 4 Correct the safety refresh monitoring time value _
151. ansmission stopped 1 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Network Information 2 Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the r Connected Station Information Network Type kc IE Field Network No 1 m e n u Station Type Master Station Station No 0 TDO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics All Stations Information Select All Clear All Selections 3 Click the Link Stark Stop button in the CC IE Operating Master Stat E r f operating toca Staton Field Diagnostics window ooren asao Or right click a module icon in Network Status and click Link Start Stop The Link Start Stop window opens mLink Start Stop Executing Contents Link Start Link Stop Forced Link Start Forced Link Start will be executed for the station that is link stopped by other stations or the station that is link stopped by special relay special register Issuing request for link start stop contents in stations that are on selected status in all stations information Link status might not be changed immediately because of circuit status Factor Please reopen window or check in network configuration when there is no change in link status Close 138 Link Start Stop Network Information Connected Station Information Network No 1 Network Type ke IE Field Station Type Master Station Station No 0 Link Start Stop Setting Contents All Stations
152. ard station Station No 1 Standard communication PM E Master station Local station Local station safety station safety station standard station Station No 0 Station No 3 Station No 2 Seconnecion 29 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES This chapter describes the names of each part of the master local modules No Application Name Indicates the operating status ON Operates normally OFF A hardware failure or a watchdog timer error has occurred Indicates the station type ON Operates as a master station safety station Operates as a local station Indicates the mode In online mode Flashing In test mode The module is performing a hardware test self loopback test or loop test In offline mode Data link not performed 1 Indicates the status of the data link Data link in operation cyclic transmission in progress Flashing Data link in operation cyclic transmission stopped OFF Data link not performed disconnected OFF Displays the sending status of data ON Sending data Data not sent Displays the reception status of data ON Receiving data OFF Data not received 30 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES Application Indicates the error status of the master local module The description of the errors can be confirmed in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 No Name One of the following errors has occ
153. are correctly set e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Correct the target station s CPU type at the request source of the JSI OPO JOU G Z4 Target station s CPU type error dedicated instruction and retry the operation dedicated instruction e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the arrival monitoring time at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station target station or relay station detected an error ES identify the cause of the error and take action Arrival monitoring time error i i e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation dedicated instruction e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly e Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station target station or relay station detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Number of resends error dedicated hes e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation in
154. ary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved station cancel restoration when the own station is a local station Request error of temporary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved station cancel restoration when different settings are simultaneously performed Data link start stop instruction out of range Data link start stop retry error another station Data link start stop retry error own station Data link start stop retry error entire system Data link start stop station error Station type error station that starts stops data link throughout the entire system Transient data command error Data link start stop command instructing stations different Action Data link start failed due to any of the following causes Remove the error cause and retry the operation e Station No not set e CPU module error on the own station e Master station duplication e Station type mismatch e Master station lost e Own station No out of range e Station No duplication own station e Own station reserved e Parameter error e Parameter communication in progress e Parameters not received master station only and no slave station exists e Link stop command e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again t
155. asing the Mitsubishi MELSEC QS series programmable controllers This manual describes the overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and operating procedure system configuration parameter setting functions programming and troubleshooting of the QSO0J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network master local module hereafter abbreviated as master local module Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC QS series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC LOW VOLTAGE AND MACHINERY DIRECTIVES 1 2 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC Low Voltage and Machinery Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC Low Voltage and Machinery Directives For the product This product complies
156. ata is stored in that of the master station When m 1 Calculation No block data assurance per station Normal value SM x 1 LS x k SL 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 Maximum SM x 2 LS x k n1 value SL x1 SM x 2 LS x k SL x 1 SM x 2 LS x 2 SL x 1 SM x 2 LS x k SL x 1 When m 2 to 4 Calculation Block data assurance per station No block data assurance per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value a oe SM x 1 LS x m SL x n SM x 1 LSxm SLxn SM x 1 LS x m SL Xn Maximum SM x 2 LS xm x k n1 SMx 2 LS x mx 2 SM x 2 LS x n1 1 SM x 2 LS x m x 2 value SL x n 1 SL x n 1 SL x 2 SL x 2 SM Sequence scan time of the master station LS Link scan time SL Sequence scan time of the local station n1 SM LS Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer n LS x m SL Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer k SL LS x m Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer m Number of points of RWw RWr Setting set for the local station in Network Configuration Settings Number of points in RWw RWr Setting Item 0 to 256 words 257 to 512 words 513 to 768 words 769 to 1024 words 2 e Master station RWw gt Local station RWr The table below shows formula
157. ation Shows the station type local station of the master local module 0000 Master station or no parameter 0001 Local station Shows the baton pass status of the master local module 0000 No baton token passing 0001 Baton token passing Shows the data link status of the master local module 0000 No data link 0001 Data link in execution Shows the L ER LED status of PORT2 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows the LINK LED status of PORT2 0000 OFF 0001 ON Displays the network number Displays the station number When no station number is set 0 is displayed Shows the mode of the master local module 0000 Online Normal Mode 0001 Online High Speed Mode 0002 Offline 0006 Loop test 0007 Self loopback test 0009 Hardware test Shows the station type of the master local module 0000 Master station 0003 Local station 263 JOWUOW WaIshS q snje1S jnpow ed07 4JeISe 24 Huryosuy 9 Z APPENDICES Appendix 1 Details of 1 0 Signals The following describes I O signals for the safety CPU module of the master local module in detail The I O numbers in Appendix 1 are shown based on a start I O number setting of 0 for the master local module Appendix 1 1 Module failure X0 This is a signal that confirms the status of the master local module e OFF Module normal e ON Module failure Module failure X0 Module READY XF A Power on Appendix 1 2 Own station data link status X1 Thi
158. ation safety station Local station Local station safety station safety station 67 a Preparing for a loop test After wiring set the local stations safety stations to online mode before executing the loop test ip Master station safety station lex In the case of a local station safety station Module 1 a ne Network type Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Select CC IE Field Local station Safety Station No Select Online 3 Connect GX Developer to the CPU module Set the local stations safety stations to online mode by GX Developer Reset the slave stations or power off and on to set the mode to online For slave stations other than the local station where the master local module is mounted also set their mode to online For the setting method of slave stations refer to the manual of the slave station used 68 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING b Procedure Perform a loop test from the master station safety station 1 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Master station safety station 2 Set network parameters in GX Developer as Module 1 i 1 Network type CCIE Field Master station Safety Select S h own in the fi g ure to left Starting 1 0 No CC IE Field Master Network No EE Field Master staten Se om Total tations ale bos e D Project data list gt Parame
159. ation RY Station No 1 Station No 2 Station Station No 1 No 1 No 1 Station Station No 2 NON RWw RWr No 1 i No 1 Station Station No 2 No 2 R RWw No 1 No 1 No 1 Station i Station No 2 1 No 2 7 No 2 station RY peer ee No 1 Station Station NON NON mmm meme eee ee Ey e eee ee mame eee ee ey uolssiuusuel OIOAD Zg ainjle Jo aseo ul Buas snes ynduy zg CN ee ee ee G ee ee a er a ee ee a Point Input data of safety communication from the data link faulty station is cleared regardless of the input status setting of the data link faulty station and the safety CPU operation mode 113 1 Setting method a Input status of data link faulty station It can be set in the Network Operation Setting L gt Page 85 Section 7 4 Network Operation Setting fx Parameter Mame Data Link Faulty Station Setting Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data RAY C Hold Input Data R4RY Output Setting During CPL STOP f Hold C Clear 4LL OFF 2 Precautions a When data link is stopped by users When cyclic transmission is stopped using one of the following methods the input status of the faulty station is held e CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 138 Section 9 4 e Link special relay SB link special register SB lt _ gt Page 221 Section 11 3 1 b Setting on a station with a data link error When the following setti
160. ation and check if it can properly communicate by the configured parameters Create a program Debug the program by using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Safety CPU operation mode change to safety mode E Change the safety CPU operation mode to safety mode using GX Developer 46 Page 77 CHAPTER 7 Page 67 Section 6 4 1 Page 209 CHAPTER 11 Page 124 CHAPTER 9 RA QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 CC Link IE Field Network Configuration This section describes CC Link IE Field Network configurations The master local module operates as the following station in CC Link IE Field Network e Master station safety station e Local station safety station e Local station standard station 5 1 1 Single network system 1 Overall system configuration Single network system is a system that consists of a master station and slave stations connected by Ethernet cables a Configuring a system using safety stations only One master station safety station and up to 31 local stations safety stations can be connected Switching hub Ethernet cable 1000BASE T 7 gt So aA i m aC D gt a m Z T S T gt a naz D Master station Local station S safety station safety station O mD 1 station Up to 31 stations a 3i mD 47 48 b Configur
161. ation settings of the master station match those set for corresponding slave stations Do the station types set in the network configuration settings of the master station match those set for the connected slave stations Are the refresh parameters set within correct ranges Is any refresh target device in the refresh parameter window overlapped with that of another network module Is the station number of the master local module duplicated with any of the other stations Action If the D LINK LED is flashing or off perform troubleshooting L gt Page 239 Section 12 3 3 Cancel the reserved station setting gt Page 81 Section 7 3 Set RX RY or RWw RWr data for each slave station within the allowable range L gt Page 81 Section 7 3 Correct station number s Check the station types set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station Correct the refresh parameters Link devices and link refresh assignment can be confirmed in either of the following e Network Configuration Settings lt _ gt Page 81 Section 7 3 e Assignment Image window gt Page 88 Section 7 5 2 Correct the refresh parameters Overlap of a refresh target device can be checked in the Assignment Image window through a programming tool supported by the programmable controller used Page 88 Section 7 5 2 Change the duplicated station number If the above actions do not solve the problem perform th
162. ations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station 2 C Error Invalid Station List Legends Operation Method Temporary Error Invalid Station 1s Temporary Error Es Error Invalid Station ms Station That Does Not Exist No Setting Invalid Station Not Selectable Not Selectable Operation Method 1 Select the station to execute set cancel for temporary error invalid station by clicking temporary error invalid station no setting temporary error invalid station 2 Contents that are selected in direction 1 will be reflected when pressing End Setting button Es Station To Set To Temporary Station To Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station Error Invalid Station otrnaney a End Setting g Cancel ann En 150 Open the Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore window in the same manner as shown in a Temporary error invalid station setting In Error Invalid Station List click the number of the station for which temporary error invalid station setting is to be cancelled The station number and the background turn red and white respectively Ex E gt Only temporary error invalid stations can be selected The background of a temporary error invalid station number is displayed in yellow Clicking the button will cancel the temporary error invalid station setting 9 8 Remote Operation CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Remote operations RUN
163. ations set in Total stations is Total Number of Stations displayed 90 When CC IE Field Local station Safety is selected in network setting the number of slave stations is not displayed When CC IE Field Master station Safety is selected in network setting 0 is displayed Host Station No When CC IE Field Local station Safety is selected in network setting own station number set to Station No in network setting is displayed CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING In each safety connection batch set monitoring time for a receiving l O 1 to 1000 station to detect safety communication errors Default 25 _ Page 308 Appendix 5 4 Transmission Interval Monitoring Time e Master station safety station 1 to 120 e Local station O to 120 Default Blank Communication Target Station No Set the communication target s station number Select how to establish safety connection e Active Establishes safety connection from the own station e Passive Establishes safety connection upon request from the communication target station e Active e Passive Default Active Open Method In each safety connection set monitoring time for a receiving station Safety Refresh Monitoring to detect safety communication errors 2 to 2000 Time ms Set this item for the Active side of the stations that perform safety Default 60 communication
164. be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the master station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received at least once Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Availability Master station Local safety station station a gt gt Number Parameter error status SB0170 each station Reserved station SB0180 i function disable status APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the parameter status for each station OFF No parameter errors for any stations ON Parameter error detected at one or more stations If a parameter error occurs the status of each station can be checked by the Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored This stores if a reserved station function is disabled OFF No disabled reserved station function ON Disabled reserved station function found If a
165. ber expressed in 3 digits User Start device of the own station where control data is stored S1 L gt Page 161 Section 10 4 1 a S2 Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored L gt Page 163 Section 10 4 1 b Device name Start device of the own station where read data is stored D1 A continuous area for the read data length is required L gt Page 163 Section 10 4 1 c System Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon D2 completion of the instruction Bit D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails 160 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by b15 to b7 to bO Abnormal end 00014 S1 0 ive 1 Abnormal end type bit 7 0081 User Specify the set status of data in case of abnormal end 0 After S1 11 no data is set for abnormal end 1 After S1 11 data is set for abnormal end The status of the instruction completion is stored S1 1 Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error _ gt Page 246 Section 12 5 Channels used by Specify the channels to be used by the own station S1 2 1 to 2 User own station Page 155 Section 10 2 1 Specify the CPU module on the station to be accessed 0000 Control CPU The access destination is the same as that i of when 03FFy is selected 03D0 Control system CPU redundant CPU only S1 3
166. bishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 329 Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a
167. ble and correct the bend radius Replace the Ethernet cable Configure the network in ring topology without a switching hub Power on the other stations e Check if a 1OOOBASE T compliant switching hub is used Page 57 Section 5 2 2 e Power off and then on the switching hub 239 sqgJ7 eu BulyoeyuD EZ Check item Action e Correct the wiring _ Page 47 Section 5 1 1 e If the system does not contain a switching hub e When not using the loopback function Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any station on the network either PORT1 or PORT2 The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start e When using the loopback function Check that the cables are not connected as described below Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter to e Both PORT1 and PORT2 are connected to a switching hub the CPU module gt Page 121 Section 8 6 e Although the loopback function is disabled the network is If the system contains a switching hub configured in ring topology 1 Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured e Although the loopback function is enabled the network is lt Page 121 Section 8 6 eomngniee eves oporog l o If incorrect correct the network parameter and rewrite it to the a a tepoeoy CPU module When data link starts across the entire network this procedure is successful 2 Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the
168. but can also be checked through link special relays SB and link special registers SW lt 3 Page 124 CHAPTER 9 a Checking the data link status other stations 1 Link scan time can be checked in SW005A to SW005B and SW0060 to SW0062 2 Ifan error occurs in data link any of the following link special relays SB will turn on e Baton pass status each station SBOOAO e Baton pass status master station SB00A1 e Data link status each station SBOOBO e Data link status master station SBO0B1 3 When Baton pass status each station SB00A0 turns on the station number where an error has occurred is stored in Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 When Data link status each station SBOOBO turns on the station number where an error has occurred is stored in Data link status each station SW00B0 to SW00B7 Details on the causes of error can be checked by link special relay SB and link special register SW corresponding to the station number where the error has occurred lt 3 Page 225 Section 11 3 2 b Description SWO005A Maximum baton pass station SW005B Maximum cyclic transmission station SWO0060 Maximum link scan time SW0061 Minimum link scan time SW0062 Current link scan time SWOOA0 to Baton pass status each station SWOO0A7 SBOOAO Baton pass status each station SBO0A1 Baton pass status master station SBOOBO Data link status each station SWOOBO to Da
169. cal modules flashes HE Flashing and each of the x10 LED repeatedly turns on and off ae 1325458518898 P1 Also the SD LED RD LED and LINK LED turn on LINK E L ER P2 LINK E 7 DLINK LED turns on and SD LED and RD LED turn off when the test is completed When completed z E a m RUN E a et e When completed iF A B p E a The x10 LED turns off MODE D LINK O e When failed LALI soL lero Any one of the x10 LEDs turns on and the ERR LED e l ERR LERR E o x100 turns on If the test fails replace the Ethernet cable and x10 ae LB Flashing execute the test again If the test fails again the possible cause is hardware failure of the master local When failed modules Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative with the detailed problem gt COLI Run fj LJ st description move fj E punk Lae soi Ro x100 I err E L ERR W on x10 x1 HE Flashing The test status and result can be checked through monitoring the link special relays on GX Developer N O Item Description s9 yOeqdOO HaS 7 79 BuIA BOJeg S S L Z 9 e Self loopback test completion status SBO092 ON e Self loopback test normal abnormal end SBO093 OFF e Self loopback test completion status SB0092 ON e Self loopback test normal abnormal end SBO093 ON When completed When failed 63 6 3 Wiring This section describes the cable wiring and precautions For network confi
170. can be displayed The history data are useful for troubleshooting at the start of the network system 1 Displaying event history Network Event History Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 E Detailed Information Station No 2 Continue error in Station No 1 Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Station No 2 Station No 1 Master Station 2010 12 3 28 2010 12 22 09 39 28 2010 12 22 09 39 28 2010 12 22 09 39 28 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 2010 12 22 09 39 17 2010 12 22 09 39 07 2010 12 22 09 37 46 2010 12 22 09 33 49 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status lt lt Own St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mod lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station Clear Event History Refresh History Acquisition Setting Create CSV File
171. cannot be written in e In the clock data write by the REQ instruction the first two digits of the year cannot be changed To change the first two digits of the year connect a programming tool to the CPU module to which clock data is written Then change the clock data 198 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Response data the system sets all When the target station No S1 5 is all stations or group specification 814 to AOp FF response data are not stored i Clockdata Clockdata Device Setting data read write 0081 Clock data read D1 0 Request type P O 00914 Clock data write when station number is specified by S1 5 re Sub request 0002 Clock data read Gi type 0001p Clock data write 9 D1 2 Read clock data is stored in the BCD format a o RA Month 01H to 12H Year 00x to 99H last 2 digits D1 4 eee _ OOH Day of week OOH to 06x D1 5 OOH Sun to 06H Sat O Stores Does not store eyeq YO0 9 Bunup 6ulpesy OFY dO df 804 199 2 Function a REQ instruction overview The instruction sends request data S2 to the target station for requesting service Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the request to the target station is completed the completion device D2 turns on Own station Target station Safety CPU module Master local module CPU module Network module S2 o ED Terma Clock data read write b
172. cation Safety Refresh Safety Data Transfer Device Setting Line No Target Open Method Monitoring Time Send Data Storage Device Station No ms Device Name Points Stat End DeviceName Points Stat End CTG Passive wi Target Station X def 1200 120F gt Target Station p22 to Target Station gt wt EC gt Target Station Poe Target Station Ee Target Station 6 Write the parameters to the safety CPU modules on the local stations safety stations and either reset or power them off and on TZ Online gt gt Write to PLC lt I STOP OD or powering off gt on RESET RUN sBuljjes uone s Ajajes uonejys e907 FZ LL p sn ase uole S psepuels e pue suoiels AjoJeS u ym Jo jdwexg UuoeoluNWWOD Z Point In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For parameter setting refer to the parameter explanation chapter lt _ gt Page 77 CHAPTER 7 217 11 2 4 Checking the network status Once parameters are set for the master station standard station and local stations safety stations the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of GX Works2 can be used to check whether data link is normally operating 71 Connect GX Works2 to the master station standard station 2 Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu TD Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics If the following display appears data link is normal CC IE Field Diagnostics
173. ce pausing the transient transmission and retry the operation Receive queue full e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Transient transmission failed e Exchange the cable connected to PORT1 with that connected to PORT2 at the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation 253 Error code D2A0 to D2BO D6024 to D6094 D60A D60Dy to D61 OH D6114 D6124 D6134 D6144 D6154 D6164 D6174 D6184 D6194 to D61Ay 254 e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error i Bd e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error link scan e Set Asynchronous to the link scan mode or do not set the constant link mode constant link scan time setting
174. ch debris could cause a fire failure or malfunctions The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Be sure to fix the communication cables or power cables by ducts or clamps when connecting them to the module Failure to do so may cause damage of the module or cables due to a wobble unintentional shifting or accidental pull of the cables or malfunctions due to poor contact of the cable When removing the connected communication cables or power cables do not pull the cable with grasping the cable part Pulling the cable connected to a module may result in malfunctions or damage of the module or cable For the cables to be used in CC Link IE Field Network use the ones specified by the manufacturer Otherwise the performance of CC Link IE Field Network is not guaranteed As to the maximum overall cable length and station to station cable length follow the specifications described in the MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual If not following the specification the normal data transmission is not guaranteed Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Turn off all phases of the external supply power used in the system when cleaning the module or retightening the module fixing screw
175. check if the routing parameters for each station are correctly set e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cable connected to PORT1 with that connected to PORT2 and retry the operation DOA4 to DOA6 Transient transmission failed e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cable connected to PORT1 with that connected to PORT2 and retry the operation DOA7y Transient reception failed e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Reserved station specification failed DOCO Wait for a while and reserve the station again another process in progress 247 Error code DOC1 DOC2 DOC3 DOC4 DOC5 DOC6 DODO DOEO DOE1 DOE2 DOE3 DOE4 DOFO D100 to D1014 D110 to D1134 D2004 248 Action Reserved station cancellation failed l l l Wait for a while and cancel the reserved station setting again another process in progress Da
176. counted counting stops 293 SI7 MS Ja sIBay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy Number SW007E SW007F SWOOAO to SWOO0A7 294 PORT 2 total no of received data lower 1 word PORT 2 total no of received data upper 1 word Baton pass status each station Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the cumulative count that data was received at the PORT2 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared When FFFFFFFFy is counted counting stops Stores the baton pass status for each station 0 Baton pass normal station 1 Baton pass faulty station e If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Baton pass normal station may vary by several seconds e If no response is received for one link scan the station is determined to be a baton pass faulty station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swooro 16 15 4 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 s 4 3 2 1 swoont 32 31 30 20 26 27 26 25 24 20 22 21 20 19 18 17 o swoona a ar a6 45 faa las 42 1 a0 s038 Tr lse 25 o4 50 swoona 64 6a e261 60 50 s8 57 56 55 50 s9 s2 51 50 40 swooad 0 76 76 77 76 75 74 75 72 71 70 e0 les ler 65 65 swooas 96 os se 93 s2 91 9060 a8 7 86 lt 5 e4 aa e2 er 12110090107 oo 104 19
177. cted and reconnected 000 cece eee eee 12 4 6 Communication is UNStable c4 2066 eh yendenu seen eine thee he hasan coke bs 120 Emro Code kS kea Gere Sutin eats Cae a beh oe awe od on eee ee Oa 12 6 Checking the Master Local Module Status by System Monitor 05 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Details of I O Signals peana eint e aaen ee eens Appendix 1 1 Module failure X0 trocas ro en r en ee Appendix 1 2 Own station data link status X1 nasau ee Appendix 1 3 Other stations data link status X3 nasaan a aaa Appendix 1 4 Module ready XF anana anaana ce ee Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses nananana aaea aa Appendix 2 1 Link device area buffer memory address 0 to 18975 Op to 4A1Fy Appendix 2 2 RX offset size information buffer memory address 19456 to 19695 4C00 to 4CEF Appendix 2 3 RY offset size information buffer memory address 19712 to 19951 4D00 to 4DEF Appendix 2 4 RWw offset size information buffer memory address 19968 to 20207 4E00 to JEER p h Ser ieee heat ct Se oa Seen Noe ats Saeed ee ie eet oe Rt Seta ee Appendix 2 5 RWr offset size information buffer memory address 20224 to 20463 4FO0 to AEE Vee 4 encanto stot sce tb ode stncy oaaae 270 Appendix 2 6 Own station information buffer memory address 20512 to 20536 5020 to 5038 Sree A sae a a aee nd tad eee gh grunt aad head mtd Sena eae Noa a es 271 Appendix 2 7 Oth
178. ction status of the Ethernet cable Page 74 Section 6 4 2 Check whether the communication path for transient transmission i er Page 75 Section 6 4 3 from the own station to the target station is correct CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 6 Other functions The reserved stations are included in the number of stations that will be connected to the network in the future without actually Reserved station specification connecting them Reserved stations are not detected as faulty Page 119 Section 8 4 stations even though they are not actually connected Page 142 Section 9 6 Temporary cancel of the reserved Reserved station specification can be temporarily cancelled without station setting changing the parameters Prevent the master station from detecting a slave station as a faulty Error invalid station and temporary error station even if the slave station is disconnected during data link Page 120 Section 8 5 invalid station setting This can be used when replacing a slave station during data link for Page 146 Section 9 7 instance ys uoyouny g g uonejys AjaJes uONels 13 sew e se jnpow jedoj Ja SewW y BuisA pee 37 3 3 2 Using the master local module as a local station 1 Safety communication function using the master local module as a local station safety station ok Communication starts among safety stations on the same network Communication with safety stations Page 96 Section 8 1 1 after s
179. d by the programmable controller used to the faulty station and opening the System Monitor window _ gt Page 261 Section 12 6 128 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Status of a station selected in Network Status is displayed in Selected Station Communication Status Monitor lt gt Page 130 Section 9 3 The station status is displayed on the top of Selected Station Communication Status Monitor If an error occurs a button indicating the error e g PORTZ Communication Error button is displayed Clicking the button allows checking of error details and corrective actions CC IE Field Diagnostics jiagnostics Destination E A 1 elect Station No 1 Error yY E urreni ut un The Number of Sean Ti Stations Error Occurs Legendi Network Status St CD 25 o Check the cable status between the test station and MAC Address equipment connected to the test station port oor Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Check the event histori ccurred on network I ade et z Reserved Station Pret otionse a e alta set ick Function Enable aia list y Erroi git alid Station Temporary error invalid station setting restore Also ches Sel et stori the Stati jon No a as temporarily ignored station from the lis The selected station status is displayed Selected Station Operati Star
180. d error definition is cleared Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by System link stop SB0003 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station Data link stop status gt Page 246 Section 12 5 SW0053 entire system When System link stop SB0003 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the results when executing the temporary error invalid station setting 0 Normal SW0054 TAPOIA FOr A i 1 or higher Abnormal gt Page 246 Section 12 5 x station setting result When Temporary error invalid request SB0010 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Stores the results when canceling the temporary error invalid station setting Temporary error invalid 0 Normal SW0055 station setting cancel 1 or higher Abnormal lt _ gt Page 246 Section 12 5 result When Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Stores the result when disabling reserved station function 0 Normal Result of reserved 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 246 Section 12 5 station function disable SW0056 When Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Stores the result w
181. d into a star using a switching hub and Ethernet cables Slave stations can be easily added to the network using this topology Add slave stations Star topology one by one If multiple slave stations are added at a time all stations on the network will be reconnected Therefore an error may momentarily occur in all the stations Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally The network is configured into a line by connecting the modules with Ethernet cables but without a switching hub If an error occurs stations after the faulty station will be disconnected Line topology Line topolo Master station safety station porogy Station No 0 Stations after the faulty station are disconnected 49 Item Description The network is configured into a ring using Ethernet cables Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally Ring topology Rrgtopolooy The system will continue data link among Master station safety station normal stations only Ring topology Station No 0 O gt 4 Add remove slave stations one by one If multiple slave stations are added removed at a time all stations on the network will be reconnected and an error may momentarily occur in all the stations b Station number and connection position Modules can be connected in any order regardless of the station number Station No 0 Master station safety station Station No
182. dai S UONeIS GYZ 245 12 5 Error Code List Error codes of the master local module are listed below e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D000 to D0074 Network module failure i e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise DOOF Network module failure 3 l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative D0104 Parameter error RX size over Correct the points assigned to the RX devices D0114 Parameter error RY size over Correct the points assigned to the RY devices D0124 Parameter error RWw size over Correct the points assigned to the RWw devices D0134 Parameter error RWr size over Correct the points assigned to the RWr devices e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D0144 to D0164 Network module failure 2 e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If
183. device range e Correct the value in the offset of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RWr setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RY setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the offset of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RY setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RX setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device range e Correct the value in the offset of the link device in the slave station s assignment error RX setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write
184. dule 1 Network No 1 Network Status E Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations C Set In Parameter 2 Connected Legends onnected Station Selected Station Communication Status Monitor CD 02 o MAC Address station cable status between the test station and lipment connected to the test station port equi Start or stop the network data link Module Error e d station Also check the station No set as from the list emporary Error Invalid Station Temporary error invalid station setting restore Also check etting Restore the station No set as temporarily ignored station from the list Selected Station Operation i P Start the system monitor in the selected station and check Sieen Mokar the selected station PLC status Remote Operation Start the selected station remote operation and change PLC status for the selected station Point Descriptions of icons Clicking the Legends button will display a brief description of the icon Monitor Status CEJ eese _ i i fontani Stop Monitor o m m Stations that cannot be selected The following stations cannot be diagnosed e A station whose network number mismatches A station where the master station is duplicated A station whose station number is duplicated e A station whose station type is incorrect Check the error details by directly connecting a programming tool which is supporte
185. dule User s Manual lt SH 080972ENG 13JZ54 gt MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual lt SH 080919ENG 13JZ48 gt CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual lt SH 080939ENG 13JZ50 gt CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCIEF B lt SH 080980ENG 13JZ58 gt 3 CPU module user s manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection lt SH 080626ENG 13JR92 gt QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080627ENG 13JR93 gt QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions lt SH 080628ENG 13JWO1 gt Description Overview of CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC Q series master local module Overview of CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC L series master local module Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting of the head module Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting of the Ethernet adapter module Spec
186. dule module Network No 4 Network No 1 O C Relay station 4 Safety Safety oul O a a z module module module CC Link IE Field Network ED Network No 5 O CPU module 4 qQ ees No 6 Relay station 6 E P P E CPU module O P P 4 P O Relay station 5 O ce E Network No 7 C E Relay station 7 CPU CPU CPU module module module Network No 9 Network No 8 CPU CPU CPU module module module Relay station 8 Point Only one master local module can be mounted on a safety base unit Therefore a safety programmable controller cannot relay more than one CC Link IE Field Network To relay more than one CC Link IE Field Network systems use a standard programmable controller Use the communication test in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics to check whether the routing of transient transmission from the own station to the destination is correctly performed or not 154 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 0 2 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 1 0 2 1 Precautions for link dedicated instructions The following describes precautions when using link dedicated instructions 1 Changing data specified for dedicated instructions Do not change each data such as control data until a dedicated instruction operation is completed 2 When a dedicated instruction cannot be comple
187. e 1 Performance specifications comparison Specifications Item Q series master local module QJ71GF11 T2 Master local module Number of connectable safety stations per network 32 stations Maximum number of safety Asynchronous mode ee 31 connections inputs outputs per safety Output connection Station type Submaster station standard station Local station safety station 8 words Master station standard station Master station safety station Local station standard station Local station standard station 2 Functional comparison a Added functions The following are the functions added on the master local module QS0J71GF11 T2 Communication with Communication starts among safety stations on the same network y Page 96 Section 8 1 1 safety stations after safety connections are established l i Information on errors occurred in safety stations and errors Safety Error log registration l em a occurred in communications among safety stations are transferred Page 99 Section 8 1 2 communication function ee to the safety CPU module and registered as error logs If an error occurs in safety communication this function cuts off the Safety station interlock naton safety communication and prevents automatic resumption of the Page 100 Section 8 1 3 communication 317 jnpow JedO JO SEW y pue jnpow jevoj sew sanas O 94 UBEMjeg uosuedwon Z xIpUueddy yOnNpoJg Hunsixy ue yum uo
188. e 1 Own station request source i E gt L re SS SSS mas a ca a ee ss oe SO Station No 2 Relay s S Relay p station 2 y Station No 1 se m m m m m 1 I I I l I 1 l I I 1 1 Communication ee aaa a ee eee target 4 ee a a I 4 4 CC Link IE Field Network Routing parameters for stations of network No 1 No setting is required for station No 3 because data are transmitted via the station itself Routing parameters for stations of network No 2 Relay No setting is required for station network No station No No 0 because data are transmitted 2 via the station itself No setting is required for station No 2 because data are transmitted via the station itself Routing parameters for stations of network No 3 Target Relay network No network No station No Sl No 3 because data are transmitted No setting is required for station via the station itself 1 2 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Set routing parameters in GX Develoepr as shown in the figure to left gt Page 92 Section 7 7 Project data list lt gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Routing parameters button 19 S9 UONCDIUNWLUOD 79 BuIA Joy SISO 7 9 Connecting interface Use lt gt PLC module fo Station No
189. e Correct the command code at the request source of the dedicated Command code error dedicated instruction and retry the operation instruction e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Set the used channel within the allowable range at the request source of Used channel error dedicated the dedicated instruction and retry the operation instruction e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect transient data a e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Correct the target station number at the request source of the dedicated Target station No error dedicated instruction and retry the operation instruction e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect transient data Bota e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are Dedicated instruction received twice connected properly e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters
190. e Input from the local station The device of the safety CPU module turns on The status data of the device of the safety CPU module is stored in the own station send range of the link device RY RWw The status data of the link device RY RWw of the local station is stored in the link device RX RWr of the master station safety station by link scan The status data of the link device RX RWr of the master station safety station is stored in the device of the safety CPU module by link refresh 103 8 2 2 Link refresh Data can be automatically transferred between the link devices of the master local module and the devices of the safety CPU module Safety CPU module Master local odule ay Link Device device Link refresh RWw 1 Concept of the link refresh range The area range set with the refresh parameters and also specified in Network Configuration Setting is executed by link refresh Safety CPU module Master local module Device Link device Actual link refresh range Range set by refresh parameters Range set in the network configuration setting Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh 2 Shortening the link refresh time and transmission delay time Use the following method to shorten time mentioned above by reducing the number of link refresh points of the safety CPU module e Inthe refresh parameters sett
191. e eee 321 Appendix 10 External Dimension Diagram 0 000 cc eee eee 323 INDEX 325 REVISION ance het heen Gta nets 4 as tte whe ea ete Benoa hee Rhy ra a pate aera aes Genesee 328 WARRANTY criata ere rah Avie e aie Heese ea er ees St Be eee we eu ts Be ak eres 329 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING is used for m window names and items 7 1 1 Setting method The chapter of i Setting Rerameters the current page is shown 1 shows operating a ane yocedurs O the QS Parameter 4 ter dialog box procedures Open arameter alog BOX S Project data list gt Parameter PLC Parameter 24 Select the VO Assignment tab T shows mouse operations 1 is used for items in the menu bar and tem Description Setting range i i Type Select the type of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 2 the project window di a Model Name Select the model name of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 3 Points Set the number of points assigned each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 4 Start XY Specify a start O number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 5 Configure the switch setting of the builtin VO or intelligent function A Switch Setting manules Page 74 Secti
192. e following tests on the master local module to check for hardware error e Hardware test lt _ gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test lt _ gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 243 wojdwAs Aq Bulnooussjqnos yZ pewWJOLed q joUuUeD UOISsiwWsuUed DOAD Zy ZL 12 4 3 Transient transmission cannot be performed The following lists the actions to be taken if transient transmission cannot be performed with the target station and a programming tool supported by the programmable controller used cannot perform monitoring Action Check item If the D LINK LED is off perform troubleshooting gt Page 239 Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station on or flashing Section 12 3 3 In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics identify the cause of the Is the baton passing status of the target station normal error and take action _ Page 124 CHAPTER 9 Are the following control data of the dedicated instruction correct e Target station s CPU type Correct the control data of the dedicated instruction e Target station s network number e Target station number Is the station number of the master local module duplicated with Change the duplicated station number any of the other stations If the above actions do not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for an error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test lt gt Pa
193. e4 0 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 e0 66 67 66 6s swooes 6 s e4 es 02 21 s0 a0 se Ter lee e5 e4 0 a2 e swooes 1111010108 07 1061051040310 101100 6 98 97 o swooe7 haolrroh lrr7inelslrealis Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOAO0 to SWO0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Number SWOOFO to SWOOF7 SW0100 to SW0107 CPU RUN status each station Operation status each station 1 Description Stores the RUN status of each station 0 RUN STEP RUN 1 STOP PAUSE stop error b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swooFo 16 15 14 1312 11 f10 9 8 z7 efslafaf2 1 swoor1 s2 181 3028 28 27 26 25 24 25 22 21 20 10 1817 SWOOF2 Swo0F3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swoor4 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 SWOOFS 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 SWOOF6 1 12 1 14 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swooF7 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a s
194. eamless access of programmable controllers on other networks such as Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 is also possible Safety CPU module Master station Local station Safety CPU module safety station safety station Command Device Device CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 4 Settings and diagnostics by GX Developer a Setting parameters Parameters for master local modules can be set using GX Developer gt Page 77 CHAPTER 7 E Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameter Module No 1 Se CM ROMO Assionment method Points Start Start End Network type Starting 1 0 No ee eed ev name Points _ TransferSB SB 512 0000 CFF Pp NetworkNo Transer Sw sw sta ooo ovr 1i otal stations 256 ooog saxes 4444 44 ld 5 5 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 E Network Parameter CC IE Field Safety Communication Setting Module No 1 Set up safety communication Assignment Method Total Number of Stations C pu Paean Host Station No G Start End Transmission Interval 25 Monitoring Time oi Communication Safety Refresh Safety Data Transfer Device Setting l Target Open Method Monitoring Time Receive Data Storage Device Send Data Storage Device A Station No ms End Target Station gt 0000 003F gt Target Station Stat CT 0o00 Active v 60 Target Station gt X v 0040 007F gt Target Station CG Sa Target Station gt 0
195. ected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Temporarily cancel the reservation and then reserve the station again 144 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS A reservation for a slave station can also be temporarily cancelled reset using link special relay SB and link special register SW of the master station safety station lt _ gt Page 221 Section 11 3 b Reserving the slave station again 1 Open the Reserved Station Function Enable R d Station Function Enabl H H H served Station Function Enable window in the same manner as shown in a Temporarily enable reserved stations Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station Te m po ra ri ly Ca n ce l l n g a rese rvatio n It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station is turned OFF or reset m u At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station 2 a n Re se rved Stati O n Li st j cl l ck th e n u m be r of th e Reserved Station List E station to be reserved again The station number and the background turn red and light blue respectively ex a i Only stations not specified as a reserved station can be selected displayed in orange 3 Clicking the button will reserve the slave Legends Operation Method Cs R
196. ection 10 8 1 c Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon System D2 completion of the instruction Bit D1 D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails 194 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by b15 to b7 to b4 to bO o0 ohl o h Abnormal end 00114 S1 0 Woe 1 Abnormal end type bit 7 0091 User Specify the set status of data in case of abnormal end 0 After S1 11 no data is set for abnormal end 1 After S1 11 data is set for abnormal end The status of the instruction completion is stored S1 1 Completion status 9 Normal System Other than 0 Error lt gt Page 246 Section 12 5 own station gt Page 155 Section 10 2 1 3 Specify the CPU module on the station to be accessed 0000 Control CPU The access destination is the same as that i of when 03FFy is selected 03E0 e Control CPU single CPU system 00004 H e CPU No 1 multiple CPU system 03D0 to 0O3D3 Target station s S1 3 User eee bail Oropi E 0 S When the instruction is executed by specifying a control system CPU 03D0 or standby system CPU 03D1 if system switching occurs y m in the target station the instruction may fail CPU module error code O 42444 42484 o If the above error occurs and the instruction fails execute the S instruction again Specif
197. ed or execution in progress ON Completed x If completed the completion status can be checked by Loop test normal abnormal end SB0095 Stores the loop test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion ON Abnormal completion Condition e This is enabled when Loop test completion status SBO094 is on Stores the loop test request accept status OFF Loop test not accepted ON Loop test accepted The master station is turned on during loop test mode The slave stations are turned on during the loop test and turned off when the loop test is completed Stores the baton pass status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Faulty station found If a faulty station is found the status of each station can be checked by Baton pass status each station SWOOAO to SW00A7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO00A7 may be offset by one O sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Number Baton pass status SBOO0A1 l master station Data link status each SBOOBO station Data link status SBO0B1 master station Reserved station SBO0CO l setting status Error invalid station SBOODO setting APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores
198. ed through link special relays SB and link special registers SW lt gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 71 The number of communication errors is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 and SW007C to SWO07F The number can be cleared by Clear communication error count SB0006 2 When network event history occurs Event history status SB007A is turned on Number of network event history items is stored in Event history cumulative count SW007A The number can be cleared by Event history count clear SB0009 SB0006 Clear communication error count SB0009 Event count clear PORT1 cable disconnection detection count PORT1 receive error detection count PORT1 total no of received data lower 1 word PORT1 total no of received data upper 1 word SB007A Event history status Event count PORT2 cable disconnection detection count PORT2 receive error detection count PORT2 total no of received data lower 1 word PORT2 total no of received data upper 1 word 228 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 7 Checking test results before wiring Test results are checked through the LED on the master local module but can also be checked through link special relays SB lt s Page 60 Section 6 2 a Checking hardware test results 1 When the hardware test is completed Hardware test completion status SB0090 is turned on 2 When failed Hardware test normal abnormal end SB0091 is turned on Number Description Description SBO0090 Hardware test compl
199. ed through link special relays SB and link special registers SW lt s Page 146 Section 9 7 a Setting a temporary error invalid station 1 Specify the station number to set a temporary error invalid station in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 2 Turnon Temporary error invalid request SB0010 Temporary error invalid request accept status SB0058 is turned on A When a temporary error invalid station is set Temporary error invalid setting completion status SB0059 turns on 5 Temporary error invalid station status SB00E0 turns on and the station No of the temporary error invalid station is stored in Temporary error invalid station status SW00E0 to SW00E7 6 When the temporary error invalid station is set with error an error code will be stored in Temporary error invalid station setting result SW0054 7 Turn off Temporary error invalid request SB0010 Number Description Description SW0010 to Reserved station function disable temporary error SB0010 Temporary error invalid request SW0017 invalid station setting SB0058 Temporary error invalid request accept status SW0054 Temporary error invalid station setting result SB0059 Temporary error invalid setting completion status SWOOEO to Temporary error invalid station setting SW00E7 SBOOEO Temporary error invalid station status b Canceling a temporary error invalid station
200. ed when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the setting status of the reserved station 0 Other than reserved station also includes stations specified as reserved station disable status 1 Reserved station b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swooco 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swooct s2 31 s0 29 26 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 16 17 SW00C2 swooc3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swooc4 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 swoocs 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Swo0C6 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swooc7 hzomoh1sjrej11s114 13 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO0A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored APPENDICES Availability Master station Local safety station station O O 295 SI7 MS Ja sIBay Jeloeds yu y xIpusddy Number SWO0O0DO i Error invalid station o setting status SW00D7 SWOOEO l
201. eed had det eees 56 SA ables tess eats ENE EE E aera T cde Get a eres se ae oak ET 56 P22 SAH ea a seen tas Aenea ae cnt ee ements ciety aa eee tl lata ery EN 57 53 Wpplicable systemis aeaea Aa bee oats Seis A T ae ee ee ols eee a 58 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 59 OA MSTA ARON e308 fee et es at te ot re Bee Be een eee tae e oe ele ee tds oe 59 62 Wests Before WiInNG 2 4ach oy alowed 4 Seni s pain erdee aed Sudan wah ee yom 60 624 Hardware estaire nia g ayn eee ha dae a fons Sas eee eA AN le ae fog alee he 60 6 2 2 Self loopback test 0 0 0 0 eee eee beeen eee e nes 62 Oo ANN seara ot tudes qs ereene tebe ayer eee an Gale a aes os see a ace a 64 CA Sesto Allen Winner tere wt n e a ora Sale eee Wont eae ee asus eae eee 67 6 4 1 Looptest 0 0 cee ee eee eee e eben eens 67 G42 Cabledest 4 site dct ewes acn caters cdi deaen Sela wae Saeed ee nena an 74 643 Communication 16Styid2 25 ce teers na cae hte nee eek oes Se eSGas een 15 10 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING Tf eM Parame er A b 42 Ak Sere ao 2 atine oe oe t tS 8 ati eee te alee E ate dhe ee alos eaten tale e 7 ko NetWork SEUNG sinopse iea ere ea aa Ghose oso wed el E a aa dees 19 7 3 Network Configuration Setting 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 81 7 4 Network Operation Setting 0 0c ccc eee eee eee eens 85 To 6JRetresh Paramelels anec ot oubeOeie ee aa a el Laes oiiead LaeweeeeSiGeeeboweee 86 7 6 Safety Communication Setting a
202. eplace the cables with 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Page 56 Section 5 2 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used D th bli diti bend radi t th aie j K eA A ETAS EEG Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend radius specification Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable Are the switching hub and other stations connected to the EAN Power on the switching hub and the other stations master local module normal If the above actions do not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for an error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 e Cable test gt Page 74 Section 6 4 2 241 sqg71 84 BuryoeyD EZL 12 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom Troubleshooting methods are described by symptom Perform these troubleshooting if the following communications cannot be established even though no error is detected in the master local module e Safety communication e Cyclic transmission e Transient transmission If an error has occurred in the master local module identify the error cause using GX Developer L gt Page 235 Section 12 2 12 4 1 Safety communication cannot be established The following lists the actions to be taken if safety communication c
203. er local modules For slave station settings refer to the manuals for the slave stations used 7 1 Parameter List The following table lists CC Link IE Field Network parameters 1 Parameters set for a master local module The following table lists parameters that need to be set for safety and standard communications E Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 CCIE FedMaste saion Seley wfe OOOO o oe eee se Network No 1 Total stations Station No m mjm Necessary setting No setting Already set Set if it is needed No setting Already set Start I O No Please input the starting L O No of the module in HEX 6 bit form Routing parameters Assignment image Check End SI7 Jo OWeIeY Z O Always A When required Cannot be set Master Local Local Item station station station Reference safety safety standard station station station Network type Stating VO No po oO Oo Network No po O Page79 section Network setting see po Ff Station No Pp o e Mode ooe o j o Master Local Local Item station station station Reference safety safety standard Network Configuration Link Scan Mode Setting Loopback Function Supplementary Setting Setting Block Data station station station Page 81 Section 13 Assurance per Station Network O ti ii Data Link Faulty Station Setting Setting l Out
204. er station information buffer memory address 20544 to 24383 5040p to 5F3Fp Pe eset I A ah aps AD Ae es a A es a a 272 Appendix 3 Link Special Relay SB List 20 0000 0c ccc eee nee 273 Appendix 4 Link Special Register SW List 20 0000 00 cece ee 286 Appendix 5 Processing Time 1 2 54 Arcos ett ee Sn yh a ee bt teed pe 302 Appendix 5 1 Link refr eshtimen cusecaitwd Saeed Aisha ded we Beek ee ae 302 Apoendix5 2 Acink SCan times s 2 0 3 4 2 2 05 o 200e aos erep Pa E rE r a ee Pa 303 Appendix 5 3 Cyclic transmission delay time 0000 eee 304 Appendix 5 4 Transmission interval monitoring time 0000 eee eee ee 308 Appendix 5 5 Safety refresh monitoring time 0 0 cece eee 309 Appendix 5 6 Transmission delay time of dedicated instructions 000008 310 Appendix 6 New and Improved Functions 0 000 eee ee ee eee 312 Appendix 7 Comparison with an Existing Product 0 0 0 ccc cece eee 313 Appendix 7 1 Comparison between the CC Link Safety master module and the master local BO st genta Se erro ete teat ate eres here caine a foetal E EAE AN 313 Appendix 7 2 Comparison between the Q series master local module and the master local module E A E E ee hula Geta alae lates tana gee Gene Tee one fee en Ge E 317 Appendix 8 Precautions for When Connecting the MELSEC iQ R Series Module 320 Appendix 9 Checking the Serial Number and Function Version 0 0c cec
205. eral link scans the station is determined as a cyclic transmission faulty station and the status is stored in Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO00B7 2 Write the program to the CPU module on the master station standard station and either reset or power it off and on XZ Online gt Write to PLC lt or powering off on 3 Set the CPU module on the master station standard station to RUN N D 220 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 3 Using Link Special Relay SB and Link Special Register SW This section describes how to use link special relay SB and link special register SW For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the following Page 273 Appendix 3 e Page 286 Appendix 4 1 Stop and restart of cyclic transmission Stop and restart of cyclic transmission are executed by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be executed through link special relays SB and link special registers SW lt 37 gt Page 138 Section 9 4 a Stop and restart of cyclic transmission other station Cyclic transmission stop 1 Specify the station to stop cyclic transmission in the following link special registers SW Specifying a target station Link stop start direction SW0000 Specifying a station number Link stop start direction SW0001 to SW0008 2 Turn on System link stop SB0003 3 When the master local module accepts t
206. error count SB0006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swora0 16 15 14 19 72 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swot31 32 31 20 20 28 27 26 2528 20 22 ar 20 1918 17 swor22 48 47 46 45 44 40 42 44 40 90 36 a7 36 0534 00 sworaslea e3 e2 61 e0 so se 57 56 55 50 sa s2 51 s0 40 sworsaleo 78 78 77 76 75 74 72 72 71 70 60 68 67 66 65 swo136 36 os 94 28 02 o1 e0 0 as e7 e6 65 24 ea a2 6 swo 96 112 111 110 10e108 107 106 10s 1041102101100 9 36 97 swors7 haohisolrahia7iriehslrialits Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 Stores the station number receiving an error frame on the transmission path at each station s PORT1 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of the own station s PORT1 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of the own station s PORT 1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO sworaolr 15 14 13 12 10 9 7 6 54 3 2 1 swor4i 32 et 30 20 28 ar 28 25 2 23 202
207. error frame reception status each station PORT1 error frame reception status master station PORT2 error frame reception status each station APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the continuation error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with continuation error found If a station with a continuation error is found the status of each station can be checked by Operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the continuation error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Continuation error occurred Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT1 error 0 frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 may be offset by one seque
208. eserved Station Cs Reserved Station Reserved Station No Setting Cs Station That Does Not Exist t ti H Function Disable Not Selectable Not Selectable S a IO n ag a In Operation Method 1 Select the station to disable reserved station function or to enable reserved station functionl by clicking Reserved Station Function Disable Reserved Station Function Enable 2 Contents that are selected in direction 1 will be reflected when pressing End Setting button Os Reserved Station Es Station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function 145 Bulyjes uones pam s y uozs y Huijaoueg 9 6 9 7 Setting Canceling Temporary Error Invalid Station A slave station not set as an error invalid station can be temporarily set as an error invalid station Use this function to temporarily prevent detection of a slave station error or to cancel temporary error invalid station setting However if a local station safety station set as a temporary error invalid station is disconnected an error will occur in safety communication with the disconnected station 1 Selecting the target module in Network Status a Temporary error invalid station setting 1 Network Status Total Slave Stations gt Total Slave Stations gt Current Link i The Number of 2 Set In Parameter Connected Scan Time MS Stations Error O Connected Station MasterSafet 0 LocalSafety 1 LocalSafetp 2 P1 E E E Te
209. et in the write notification device D3 is ignored Operation is the same as the WRITE instruction UOIE1S JOUJOUY UO 19 01 U00 jqewweboId 24 0 geq Hun FLINMS dD d f Z OL 187 188 1 Setting data Jn Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access 16 bit binary T Start I O number of the master local module of the own station 00 to 3Ep Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in 3 digits Start device of the own station where control data is stored meal S1 lt gt Page 188 Section 10 7 1 a S2 Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored L gt Page 188 Section 10 7 1 b Device name Start device of the target station where data is to be written D1 A continuous area with the write data length is required L gt Page 188 Section 10 7 1 c Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon D2 completion of the instruction System D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails ai i Device of the target station which is turned on for 1 scan upon D3 completion of the instruction Data writing from another station can be confirmed a Control data The control data of the SWRITE instruction control data is the same as that of the WRITE instruction C gt gt Page 175 Section 10 6 b Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored The star
210. etion status SB0091 Hardware test normal abnormal end b Checking self loopback test results 1 When the self loopback test is completed Self loopback test completion status SB0092 is turned on 2 When failed Self loopback test normal abnormal end SB0093 is turned on Number Description Description SB0092 Self loopback test completion status SB0093 Self loopback test normal abnormal end 8 Checking test results after wiring Test results are checked by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be checked through link special relays SB gt Page 67 Section 6 4 a Checking loop test results 7 Whena loop test is started Loop test request accept status SB0O09A is turned on 2 When the loop test is completed Loop test completion status SB0094 is turned on 3 When failed Loop test normal abnormal end SB0095 is turned on Number Description Description SB0094 Loop test completion status SBO0095 Loop test normal abnormal end SB009A Loop test request accept status 229 MS 13 s169 jeloeds yu pue gs Aej y jeloeds yurq BuIsN E L 9 Checking parameter status The reflection status and setting contents of parameters can be checked by link special relay SB and link special register SW a Checking the parameter status other stations 1 When a station on the network has a parameter error Parameter error status each station SB0170 is turned on 2 The station number whe
211. etting example refer to gt Page 209 CHAPTER 11 84 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 4 Network Operation Setting Set operating status of a network if a data link error occurs or the safety CPU module is set to STOP A Configure network setting gt Page 79 Section 7 2 2 Open the setting window in GX Developer XW Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Network Operation Setting button 3 Set parameters in the window Network Operation Setting Parameter Hame r Data Link Faulty Station Setting f Tum OFF or 0 Clear Input Data Rx AYy Hold Input Data RR M Output Setting During CPU STOR Hold Clear ALL OFF Cancel Item Description Setting range Parameter Name Enter the name of network operation setting parameters if desired Up to 8 characters unas uonesedO YIOMION y Select whether to hold or clear data input by standard communication Turn OFF or O Clear Input Data from the slave station where a data link error has occurred RX RY L gt Page 113 Section 8 2 5 e Hold Input Data RX RY Data input by safety communication will be cleared regardless of this Default Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input setting and safety CPU operation mode Data RX RY Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to hold or clear cyclic data output when the safety CPU Hold module mounted with the master local module
212. evices RY RWw of the master station safety station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of each local station The status data of the link devices RY RWw of local stations are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station safety station and the link devices RY RWw of other local stations 1 I Safety CPU Master l Safety CPU I aiae station Local station ee I safety station l i Device RX RWr Device I L i Sequence eae scan scan Q N X Link refresh X I I I I Device Device I Sand range I to I i station No 1 li Sequence a als ke i l Sequence scan F station No 2 scan Ri X Link refresh BAALE Sa KS Send range Send range to f from station No 3 I station No 3 m e e e e eS e e e Se Ss eS e uolssiusuel OIOAD Zg czy Area for sending to other stations e Output from the master station safety station The device of the safety CPU module turns on The device status data of the safety CPU module is stored in the link device RY RWw of the master station yu wufisse 9IA P Yul pue moj ezeq Z8 safety station by link refresh The status data of the link device RY RWw of the master station safety station is stored in the link device RX RWr of the local station by link scan The status data of the link device RX RWr of the local station is stored in the device of the safety CPU module
213. g Value that Data length 480 is rounded up to the nearest integer b Master station lt Local station The formula for transmission delay time of dedicated instructions through the following roots is all the same e Master station safety station Local station standard station e Master station standard station Local station safety station e Master station safety station Local station safety station TD1 2 0 LS x 12 x m SM SL ms LS Link scan time SM Master station sequence scan time SL Local station sequence scan time m Number of divided sending Value that Data length 480 is rounded up to the nearest integer APPENDICES 3 Between local stations The formula for transmission delay time of dedicated instructions through the following roots is all the same e Local station safety station Local station standard station e Local station standard station Local station safety station e Local station safety station Local station safety station TD1 2 0 LS x 12 x m SLr SLs ms LS Link scan time SLr Sequence scan time of the receiving side local station SLs Sequence scan time of the sending side local station m Number of divided sending Value that Data length 480 is rounded up to the nearest integer awl Buissed0jg G xipueddy SUONONIISU pa eoip p zo aut Aejap uOIssiluSUeI 9 G xIDUeddy 311 Appendix 6 New and Improved Functions The follow
214. ge 62 Section 6 2 2 e Communication test lt gt Page 75 Section 6 4 3 12 4 4 Station is disconnected from the network The following is the troubleshooting action to be taken when a station in data link is disconnected Check item Action Is the ambient temperature for the module within the specified Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking range action such as removing heat source If the above action does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for an error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 e Cable test gt Page 74 Section 6 4 2 244 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 4 5 Station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected The following lists the troubleshooting actions to be taken when a station in data link is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected Check item Action Replace the cables with 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables L gt Page 56 Section 5 2 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used Does th bli dition bend radi t th Bee Wie eal a a acide eet Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend radius specification Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable Is the switching hub normal Power on the
215. gnal flow RUN is performed 6 Click the button to perform the remote 4 To perform remote RESET preset Allow in Remote reset in the PLC system of the PLC Parameter window Select whether to clear device memory data in the safety CPU module when remote RUN is performed UONeIBdO SIOWSY 8 6 Select whether to hold signal flow when remote operation 151 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules This chapter describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the master local modules 1 0 1 List of Dedicated Instructions The following describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the master local modules and their transmission range 1 Link dedicated instructions These instructions are used for transient transmission to or from programmable controllers on other stations Each link dedicated instruction allows access to a station on a network other than CC Link IE Field Network 152 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a List of dedicated instructions Target station other stations Instruction Description Target station Target network type Reads data from the device of another station s programmable controller In units of words For the SREAD instruction when data read is completed the device on the other station is turned on Data reading from the other station by the SREAD e QSCPU instruction can be checked e QC
216. guration cables and hubs used for the wiring refer to the system configuration L gt Page 47 CHAPTER 5 1 Ethernet cable connection a Connecting the cable 64 Power off the master local module and the connected device Push the Ethernet cable connector into the master local module until it clicks Pay attention to the connector s direction Power on the master local module and the connected device Check whether the LINK LED of the port connected with an Ethernet cable is on The time between the power on and the LINK LED turning on may vary The LINK LED usually turns on in a few seconds Note however that the time may be extended further if the linkup process is repeated depending on the status of the device on the line If the LINK LED does not turn on refer to the troubleshooting section and take corrective actions L gt Page 239 Section 12 3 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Point PORT1 and PORT2 need not to be distinguished e When only one connector is used in star topology either PORT1 or PORT2 is applicable Either one can be used QS0J71GF11 T2 e When using two connectors for line topology and ring topology an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in any combination For example the cable can be connected between PORT 1s or between PORT 1 and PORT
217. h ROM failure seas master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Communication RAM failure 7 e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Correct the data at the station that started the online test and retry the Incorrect online test data operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Communication test retry error After completion of the communication test retry the operation Te set ae l e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Communication monitoring timeout in ae of the programming tool take action and retry the operation communication test e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool take action and retry the operation Communication test transmission e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation completion wait timeout e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the routing pa
218. he hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Set the target station s in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 and retry the operation Temporary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved station cancel restoration cannot be executed from a local station Retry the operation from the master station e Temporary error invalid station setting cancel using SB0010 and SB0011 or reserved station cancel restoration using SB0012 and SB0013 cannot be simultaneously executed e Retry the operation so that only one bit in SB0010 to SB0013 may turn on after all bits in them are turned off Check the setting and stop or start data link Retry the operation after the stop or restart of data link is completed Check the setting and stop or start data link A local station cannot start or stop data link of all or multiple stations Perform these operations from the master station Correct the request command at the request station and retry the operation e Data link start was instructed from a station different from the one that had instructed the data link stop Instruct data link start and data link stop from the same station e The method of the data link start differs from that of the data link stop Instruct the data link start using the same method as the data link stop ex Data link is stopped using the CC Li
219. he other station is turned on Data reading with the SREAD instruction can be confirmed by this Start contact JPSREAD Jn JP SREAD i Start contact GP SREAD f S2 GP SREAD Un S1 or D1 D2 D3 S2 ao Available devices Setting data Internal device System user E e Sors o l PO n o YIS E 4 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used 2 For the SREAD instruction the read notification device D3 can be omitted in the programming However the operation is the same as the READ instruction The SREAD instruction can operate differently depending on whether read notification device D3 is omitted or not 3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU or a safety CPU module the data set in the read notification device D3 is ignored Operation is the same as the READ instruction 168 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 Setting data Settin gt Description Set by Data type data Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access 16 bit binary Start I O number of the master local module of the own station ai 00 to 3E Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in 3 digits S1 Start device of the own station where control data is stored _ gt Page 169 ail Section 10 5 1 a Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored 8 gt Page 169 Section 10 5
220. he request System link stop request accept status SB0056 turns on 4 When cyclic transmission stop is completed System link stop completion status SB0057 turns on 5 Station number of the station that sent the cyclic transmission stop request is stored in Data link stop request station SW004A It is stored in the station that received the stop request 6 If cyclic transmission is stopped with error an error code will be stored in Data link stop status entire system SW0053 7 Turn off System link stop SB0003 MS Je siBey jeroeds Yul pue gs Aejey jeloeds yurq BuIsN E L 221 Cyclic transmission restart 8 Specify the station to restart cyclic transmission in the following link special registers SW e Specifying a target station Link stop start direction SW0000 e Specifying a station number Link stop start direction SWO0001 to SW0008 9 Turn on System link start SB0002 10 When the master local module accepts the request System link start request accept status SB0054 turns on 11 When cyclic transmission restart is completed System link start completion status SB0055 turns on 12 If cyclic transmission is restarted with error an error code will be stored in Data link start status entire system SW0052 13 Turn off System link start SB0002 SB0002 SB0003 SB0054 SB0055 SB0056 SB0057 222 System link start SW0000 Link stop start direction l SW0001 to ee System link stop
221. hen execute the instruction 125 7Dy 1 to 120 814 to AOH FFy User me oo po oo During instruction execution For the case where the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time specified by S1 8 specify the number of Number of S1 7 resends times the instruction is resent When the instruction is completed The number of resends result is stored Specify the monitoring time until instruction completion Arivalimenitoring If the instruction is not completed within the specified time the S1 8 ie instruction is resent for the number of resends specified by S1 7 0 10 seconds 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 seconds Specify the request data count word ET Word count of data to be stored in own station start device S2 S1 9 ienath where request data is stored 2 Clock data read 6 Clock data write Store the response data count word Word count of data to be stored in own station start device D1 Response data S1 10 j where response data is stored length 6 Clock data read 2 Clock data write 196 0 to 15 User 0 to 32767 User T CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by S1 11 S1 12 to S1 15 S1 16 S1 17 Clock set flag Clock data of abnormal end Error detected station s network No Error detected station number The valid or invalid status of data after S1 12 is sto
222. hen reserved station function disable is undone 0 Normal Result of reserved 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 246 Section 12 5 station function enable SW0057 When Reserved station specification enable request SBO013 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared SW0058 Number of total slave Stores the number of total slave stations that are set by the parameters stations setting Range 1 to 120 290 APPENDICES Availability Master Number Description station Local safety station station Stores the number of total slave stations that are actually connected by Number of total slave a SW0059 data link in CC Link IE Field Network stations current value l Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected Stores the maximum station No of the stations where the baton pass is performed Maximum baton pass Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected SW005A station Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the maximum station No of the station where the cyclic transmission is performed SW005B Maximum cyclic Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected transmission station Condition e This is enabled when Data link status own station SB0049 is off Stores the minimum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit ms SW0061 Minimum link scan time Condition e This is enabled when Ba
223. i Temporary error invalid o station setting status SW00E7 296 Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the setting status of error invalid stations 0 Other than error invalid station 1 Error invalid station b15 614 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swoooo 16 15 14 13 72 11 10 e 8 7 o 5 4 s 2 1 swo0or 32 3130 28 28 27 26 25 24 23 2021 20 10 18 17 swo0o2 48 ar a6 4s 44 43 42 41 a0 30 9837 9635 94 30 swo003 se e3 e261 6050 58 57 56 55 s 55 5a st so 49 swooos s0 7878 77 76 75 7a 78 72 71 7069 6867 6665 O swo00s 36 95 e4 8802 101 o0 Teo ee e7 e6 a5 54 aa 2 er swo00e 11211110 10e109 107 106 108 0410310210110 89 7 swooor hraolrtehielrrrfrolrishialres Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the setting status of the temporary error invalid station 0 Other than temporary error invalid station 1 Temporary error invalid station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swooeo 16 15 14 13 72 11 10 sle 7 ssa 217 swooe s2 st 30 2826 27 26 25 2 25 22 21 20 10 18 17 swooe2 4 ar ae as 46 43 42 41 40 30 0837 6 05 30 33 swooes 6463 62 61 e0 s9 e 57 s6 55 54 50 52 s1 50 40 swoo
224. ia bh are ra Eea 15 Saloy dalar eger ected Seco a a i a at 15 Safety Data Transfer Device Setting 91 Safety precautions n aooaa aa 1 Safety programmable controller 15 Safety refresh monitoring time 91 309 310 Safety statio sat eu Kas el ash ee eS ee 15 Safety station interlock function 100 Scan synchronization specification 112 SD VED sxsw wie keG sais So Se OWS 6 ee 30 Self loopback test 0 auaa aaa aaa eee 62 Serial number display 200005 31 Slave station disconnection 0 36 SPECIICAUONSs t havea aw neta ee ae ned we wen es 33 SIO ty cre ast Std Sah anaes eed ata e wean ee ae 31 Standard communication 00008 15 Standard programmable controller 15 Standard station 2 0 ee EE 15 Station is disconnected from the network 244 Station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected EE EEE re een ee eee Soe eee wee cere 245 STATION NO a s wag sted aa Sia ea elena 263 Saon NO a os a5 a99 Shea Eee eat 19 Station number and connection position 50 SVNCMONOUS eta eee oak a Rare dot wees 83 System configuration 00 ee eee 47 System monitor 2 0 0 0 0 ee 261 T Temporary error invalid station 120 Temporary error invalid station restore 146 TERM ea r Gage date a a go a E a a A dad 15 TEST irern Renesas mad T A a cer aceon E 262 Tests after wiring
225. ics identify the error location and take action Then execute the loop test again 1 CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Select i Station Station No 1 Error hA The Number of 1 ms Stations Error Occurs E ene or Start Mor arf Stop Monitor Legends Module rodule 1 Network No 1 Network Status Total Slave Stations 3 Total Slave Stations 2 Set In Parameter Connected Connected Station MasterSafety 0 Divergence i e Current Link Scan Time LocalS afety 1 a LocalS afety 2 Operation Test Communication Test Check the transient communication rounte from the connected station to the destination station Cable Test Check the cable status between the test station and pag ii Eebe Test equipment connected to the test station port MAC Address m Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Check the event histories occurred on network Reserved Station Enable the reserved station Also check the station No set as Function Enable the reserved station From the list Temporary Error Invalid Station Temporary error invalid station settingfrestore Also check Setting Restore the station No set as temporarily ignored station from the list Selected Station Operation P Start the system monitor in the selected station and check System Monitor J Sustem montor the selected station PLC status Remote Ope
226. ifications procedures before operation system configuration settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Field Network interface board Description Explains the specifications of the QSCPU safety power supply module safety base unit etc Explains the functions programming methods devices etc that are necessary to create programs with the QSCPU Explains how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions and QSCPU dedicated instructions 4 Operating manual Manual name ean Description lt manual number model code gt GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Explains the online functions of GX Developer such as the lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt programming printout monitoring and debugging methods GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Safety Programmable Controller Explains the functions of GX Developer that are added or changed to support the safety programmable controller lt SH 080576ENG 13JU53 gt Memo CONTENTS SARE TAPRECAUMON ai a e a E hese A ogc eed De ery CON Oke mc nae re NA 1 CONDITIONS OFUSEEOR THE PRODUCH aa a nice Nae rie nee a E E E arene ares 5 INTRODUC TON veer te ane not ten Newer ESV E A atin weeny Mesh 72 Rascal PAu Re Caan RA ew may Since a 6 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC LOW VOLTAGE AND MACHINERY DIRECTIVES 6 RELEVANT MANUALS E vores atch enue ene in ate Ay nem em cd tie a eA a nee eon woe 7 WANUALPAGE ORG
227. ify whether the network is operating correctly The test completes approximately in 10 seconds Start testing from the master station To use a standard programmable controller for the master station refer to the following manual User s manual for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module used The test allows checking of the following items Item Description Master station duplication check Checks if the master station is duplicated Station number duplication check Checks if stations on the network are duplicated Checks if the number of connected slave stations exceeds the number of slave stations Out of range station No check set to the master station Reserved station specification S Checks if the specified reserved stations are actually connected check Consistency check of the number Consistency check for the number of total slave stations set by parameters and actual of connected stations connected slave stations Consistency check for the station type of slave stations set in master stations and actual Station type check i connected station type s doo7 y 9 Buu Joy SISO y 9 Detects whether loopback is being performed when Use is selected under Loopback Loopback check ss sige Function Setting in the network parameter window for the master station 1 Performing a loop test This section describes the procedure using the following system configuration example safety st
228. ing set only the link devices used in the safety CPU module as the link refresh range gt Page 86 Section 7 5 3 Setting method The link refresh is assigned by the Refresh Parameters gt Page 86 Section 7 5 4 Precautions For cyclic data assurance of more than 32 bits use one of the following methods e Enable the Block Data Assurance per Station setting lt gt Page 81 Section 7 3 Page 108 Section 8 2 3 2 e Create an interlock program lt _ gt Page 109 Section 8 2 3 3 104 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Point Network Configuration Setting is send to slave stations from the master station safety station as parameters Therefore the link refresh is not started until a slave station receives the parameters from the master station safety station Parameter reception status SB0077 turns off even if refresh parameters are set for the slave station ys 1 1 YUIT ZZQ uoISSIWSUEJL 21AN Zg 105 8 2 3 Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity can be assured in 32 bit units or for each station Method Description Assures data in 32 bit units 32 bit data assurance Data is automatically assured by satisfying assignment conditions of link devices Assures data in station based units Block Data Assurance per Station Data is assured by enabling the station based block data assurance in the parameter setting Assures data of more than 32 bits Interlock
229. ing a system using safety stations and standard stations One master station standard station and up to 120 slave stations can be connected per network Up to 32 safety stations can be connected per network Switching hub Ethernet cable 1000BASE T semen eee ewe wesw eee swe eee eee see ee wee ee wy Local station ee Master station standard station standard station Local station safety station De M 1 station Up to 32 stations Se i a i i i i i a a i ha i i Sh a Gh i i i ka Slave station Up to 120 stations When a Safety station is set as a master station the following restrictions apply e Some dedicated instructions cannot be used gt Page 317 Appendix 7 2 e Interlink transmission is not available Point The maximum number of safety connections per master local module is as follows e Asynchronous mode 31 connections e Synchronous mode 8 connections CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Network configuration a Network topology The network can be wired into star topology line topology and ring topology A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies but the ring topology cannot be combined with star or line topology Star topology Line topology Star and line topologies mixed Switching hub Switching hub Ring topology Wa SAs YJOMJOU B BUIS V S UOHEINBYUOD YIOMIJON PIO Fl AU IT OO V S Item Description The network is configure
230. ing an error invalid station in line topology In the following case even if a data link error occurs in the station set as an error invalid station the station is not detected as a data link faulty station However subsequently connected stations are detected as data link faulty stations Error invalid station Master station safety station Not a data link faulty station Station No 0 Data link faulty stations ee S Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect temporary error invalid station setting Resetting the master station safety station or powering off the system Temporary error invalid station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the network parameter of the master station safety station Disconnecting a station for which temporary error invalid station setting has been configured If the safety CPU module on the master station safety station is reset or the system is powered off the master station safety station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SWO0E7 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Configure temporary error invalid station setting and then cancel the setting Checking error invalid station numbers Error invalid station numbers can be checked in the Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Resto
231. ing table lists the new and improved functions No restriction on serial number and version Applicable module first Applicable GX New or improved function five digits of the serial Developer version number Connecting the MELSEC iQ R series module as a local station gt 46022 or later Page 320 Appendix 8 312 APPENDICES Appendix Comparison with an Existing Product This chapter explains the difference between the master local module and an existing product Appendix 7 1 Comparison between the CC Link Safety master module and the master local module 1 Performance specifications comparison Specifications Item CC Link Safety master module Master local module QS0J61BT12 QS0J71GF11 T2 1 station Number of Safety master station 1 station l Up to 120 slave stations can be connectable or Up to 64 remote stations can be l connected to the master station safety stations per Master station safety station connected to the safety master station station network Local station standard station Be 120 stations i station safety RWr 256 points idl els Lica a La ae Loca el Maximum link points per network Own station Safety master station 256 points 8192 points 2048 points station 2048 points Own station Local station Maximum link 1024 points Receiving station RY S2points O Safety remote station Rww Opoitts o RX 128
232. interlock status on both stations where safety communication is cut after solving the communication error cause A release request of the safety station interlock is activated at the rising edge of the device as follows gt Performed by a master local module Performed by a program l ON OFF CO O0 Safety station interlock status ON ye SM1700 SD1700 to SD1707 OFF Gp ra oo l x lt Safety station interlock cancel ON 26 request OFF o g SM1720 SD1720 to SD1727 5 l l l l Sec l l l l mi gt l l l l 5 0O 5 2 An error A safety An error A safety 3 a occurs in station occurs in station os communications interlock is communications interlock is 5 2 with a safety released with a released 52 e station safety Enabled on the station rising edge For details on special relays and special registers refer to the following manual QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 101 8 2 Cyclic Transmission Data communication is available periodically among stations on the same network Link devices RX RY RWr and RWw are used 102 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 1 Data flow and link device assignment 1 Master station safety station and local station Data can be written into the send range of each station s link device RY RWw and can be sent to any station on the same network The status data of the link d
233. invalid stations OFF No error invalid stations ON Error invalid station found If an error invalid station is found the status of each station can be checked by Error invalid station setting SW00D0 to SW00D7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Error invalid station setting SWOODO to SWO00D7 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off 281 ysI7 GS ejay jeloeds yu xIipueddy Number SBOOEO SBOOFO SBOOF1 SB0100 SB0101 282 Temporary error invalid station status CPU RUN status each station CPU RUN status master station CPU operation status each station 1 CPU operation status master station 1 Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores if there are any temporary error invalid stations OFF No temporary error invalid stations ON Temporary error invalid station found If a temporary error invalid station is found the status of each station can be checked by Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SWOO0E7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SWOO0E7 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the RUN status of each station s CPU module OFF All stations are in RUN
234. ion 125 7Dy Local station intelligent device station 1 to 120 4 If Completion status S1 1 is Channel in use dedicated instruction error codes D25A and D25B data is not stored 197 eyeq YO0 9 Bunupy 6ulpesy OFY dO df 804 b Request data a user sets all i Clock data Clock data Device Setting data read write 0001p Clock data read 00114 Clock data write when station number is specified by S1 5 S2 0 Request type l l a 00314 Clock data write when all stations or groups are specified by S1 5 S2 1 Sub request 0002 Clock data read type 0001p Clock data write a po j 1 Change pattern bit 0 to 7 From S2 2 upper byte to S2 5 specify the item to be changed 0 Do not change 1 Change b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bli bO Change Yeah last 2 digits S2 2 pattern clock uat O data to be Hour changed Minute Second Day of week 2 Change year bit 8 to 15 Use BCD format to specify the year lower 2 digits of the year b15 NA b8 Year OOH to 994 last 2 digits Lo i o o gt Use BCD format to specify the clock data to be changed S2 3 Clock data to b15 b8 b7 bO S2 4 be changed S2 3 Day 01H to 31h continued S2 4 Minute 00H to 59H S2 5 Day of week OOH to 06H Second 004 to 59x S2 5 OOH Sun to O6H Sat O Sets Does not set Point e When system protection is applied to the target station CPU clock data
235. ion safety station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 CUULOL 1 Create a project using GX Developer Select QSCPU in PLC series and QS001 in PLC Type W Project lt gt New project New Project PLE series JOSCPU PLE Type Jason Program type Label zetting f Ladder f Do not use label C SFE MELSAP L Use label oT Select when uzing m FE and structures Device memory data which is the same as program data s name is created Setup project name M Setup project name Drive Fath CAMELSEC Project name Samplet Browse Title Sample proga 2 Enter a user name and password Register new user User name Sample Access level Administrators z New password sBuljjes uoie s Ajajes uonejys e907 FZ LL p sn ase uole S psepuels e pue suoie s AjoJes u ym Jo jdwexg UuoleodluNnWWOD Z Confirm new password Access level Administrators explanation Access level with possible operation of all functions Password must be set for this access level Cancel 215 3 Display the network parameter window and set parameters as follows KO Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET E Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards Enter 1 or 2 4 Display the refresh parameter window and set parameters as follows Set the same refresh parameters for local stations safety
236. ion 12 3 e Troubleshooting by symptom lt Page 242 Section 12 4 JINp p d Old Puooys jqnoIL CCl 23 b Checking for error in the master local module 1 Select the master local module in the System CC IE Field Diagnostics _ R A E 1 H Module Module 1 Network No 1 Ry Station No 0 iil ie eee M O n ito r WI n d OW a nd cl ick the D iagnostics p Total Slave Stations 2 Total Slave Stations 2 Current Link The Number of ie Pane Set In Parameter Connected Scan Time 1 ms Stations Error Occurs PE button The CC IE Field Diagnostics window will MasterSafety 0 Divergence _ open In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics LocalS afety 1 On identify the cause of the error and take action gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 Operation Test Selected Station Communication Status Monitor icati Check the transient communication rounte From the connected Communication Test ebabicinica E Station No 0 No Error Mode Online Normal Mode Cable Test Check the cable status between the test station and ee Sable Test equipment connected to the test station port MAC Address Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Check the event histories occurred on network Reserved Station Enable the reserved station Also check the station No set as Function Enable the reserved station from the list Temporary Erro
237. ion 8 1 3 communication 2 Cyclic transmission Communication by The master station safety station communicates O data in units Communication Ben etek l ah RX and RY of bits with other stations Page 81 Section 7 3 with other Salish Communication by The master station safety station communicates I O data in units Page 103 Section 8 2 1 RWr and RWw of words with other stations Device and link lanererese Transfer between the link device of the master local module and the Page 86 Section 7 5 device access device of the safety CPU module is performed automatically Page 104 Section 8 2 2 This mode is selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the cyclic transmission and transient Mode selection for cyclic transmission transmission frequency Page 79 Section 7 2 1 The mode can be selected from Online Normal mode and ys uoyouny Ee Online High speed mode The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station Assurance of cyclic data integrity Page 106 Section 8 2 3 based units yas oS Link scan is set to asynchronous or synchronous with the sequence Scan synchronization specification Page 112 Section 8 2 4 scan of the safety CPU module Input status setting for data link faulty Select whether the input data from another station where the data Page 113 Section 8 2 5 station link error occurred is cleared or held When the safety CPU module mounted with a master
238. ion s CPU type S1 3 gt Page 156 Section 10 2 1 5 e The group specification cannot be used for CC Link IE Field Network stations e Writing of the data cannot be confirmed on the target station For whether data was written normally check the device of the write target station e Data cannot be written to the station with the station number already in use or the station with no station number setting Correct the error then execute the instruction Number of resends Arrival monitoring time Write data length During instruction execution For the case where the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time specified by S1 8 specify the number of Oto 15 User times the instruction is resent It can be set when the execution type set by S1 0 is 1 With arrival confirmation When the instruction is completed The number of resends result is stored Valid when the System execution type set by S1 0 is 1 With arrival confirmation Specify the monitoring time until instruction completion It can be set when the execution type set by S1 0 is 1 With arrival confirmation If the instruction is not completed within the specified time the 0 to 32767 User instruction is resent for the number of resends specified by S1 7 0 10 seconds 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 seconds 1 to 960 Specify the number of words to be written To QnACPU User 1 to 480 words CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRU
239. iro ICICI sof Hiro 7448 gt 1e an ERR LERR x00 slifsl err _ Ic err However if errors are detected the test is immediately x10 x1 x10 x1 terminated failure E ON e Local station safety station Bf Flashing Data link stops on all stations Also the MODE D LINK and x100 LEDs flash 69 7 Check the test result with LEDs of the master station safety station D LINK LED turns on when S C JEJE J run Qi il vst the test is completed When completed N 2 2 MODE a C D LINK e When completed The x10 and x1 LEDs turn off SD RD a al L O E ON e When failed x100 2 e ERR L ERR Any one of the x10 and x1 LEDs turns on and the ERR x1 Flashin x10 E j LED turns on Error details can be specified depending When failed on the lighting status of x10 and x1 LEDs gt 4 ke Master station duplication N a Da m o Sas No duplication i duplicati 5 2 mope I o Link p 4 SD RD 4 je Invalid station No a ON 8 8 Reserved station specification error x100 Le 8 ERR E L ERR 10 1 A station that exists on the network is set x10 x1 i Flashing as a reserved station in the master station Loopback stations exist Station type setting error Inconsistent number of total slave stations All stations faulty Identify the error location through GX Developer or link special register SW and take actions L gt Page 72 Section 6 4 1 2 8 When the
240. is off Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared O When FFFFy is counted the value returns to 0 and the module continues to count Stores the cumulative count that data was received at the PORT1 The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the O stored occurrence rate is cleared When FFFF is counted counting stops Stores the cumulative count that data was received at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared O When FFFFFFFFy is counted counting stops Stores the count of the network event history This stored count is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned on O When FFFFy is counted counting stops Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared O When FFFFy is counted the value returns to 0 and the module continues to count Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT2 The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the O stored occurrence rate is cleared When FFFFy is
241. is set to STOP e Clear ALL OFF L gt Page 115 Section 8 2 6 Default Hold Output Setting During CPU STOP 85 7 5 Refresh Parameters Set the ranges of link devices of the master local module and safety CPU module devices for which link refresh is to be performed 1 Setting procedure ae Configure network setting lt _ gt Page 79 Section 7 2 2 Open the setting window in GX Developer TD Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt button 3 Set parameters in the window 4 Click the Eni button E Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameter Module No 1 Assignment method Points Start Start End Link side PLC side Stat Transfer SB Transfer SW Default Check End Cancel Select a link device assignment method e Points Start Assignment method e Points Start Enter the points and start numbers of link devices e Start End e Start End Enter the start and end numbers of link devices Default Start End 86 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING Select link refresh ranges of SB and SW Link refresh range can be i R 1 Transfer SB set for both Transfer SB and Transfer SW by 1 L gt Page 104 Ft die redana Section 8 2 2 e PLC side M B D W SB Dev name 2 Transfer SW Dev name Points Start _ e Link side Fixed at SW e PLC side M B D
242. is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0000 to SWO0008 OFF No stop direction ON Stop direction enabled during start up Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e For SB0000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned on Clears the link special registers for the communication error SWO0068 to SWOO06B SW0074 to SW0077 SWO007C to SW007F SW0120 to SW0127 SW0130 to SW0137 SW0140 to SW0147 and SW0150 to SW0157 OFF No clear direction ON Clear direction valid while this relay is on This clears the Event history status SBO07A and Event count SWO07A OFF No clear direction ON Clear direction Errors are not counted while this is ON Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are set as temporary error invalid stations x OFF No request ON Request issued Number SB0011 SB0012 SB0013 SB0040 SB0043 SB0044 SB0045 SB0047 SB0049 APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are canceled from Temporary error invalid tf i temporary error invalid stations setting cancel reques g OFF No request ON Request issued Stations specified in Reserved station function disable tempo
243. ith the stations that are operating normally In a line topology all stations connected after the faulty station are disconnected When the station disconnected from the network due to a data link failure recovers it automatically returns to the network and restarts data link for standard communication only Only the station where an error occurs is disconnected and data link continues with the stations that are operating normally All stations after the faulty station are disconnected in line topology Page 121 Section 8 6 By using the loopback function with ring topology data link continues with the stations that are operating normally 5 Diagnostic function Function CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Hardware test Individual unit diagnostics Self loopback test Own network Loop test diagnostics Cable test Other network Communication test diagnostics 36 Description Reference The status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked by GX Developer The faulty area cause of the fault and its corrective Page 124 CHAPTER 9 action and event history can be checked in GX Developer Check the internal hardware of the master local module Page 60 Section 6 2 1 Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the Page 62 Section 6 2 2 master local module Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of Page 67 Section 6 4 1 each station Check the conne
244. ive D22F No baton pass executed in the target Check the communication status of the station whose station number is to be station changed D230 D2314 D2324 D2334 250 e The station number change was attempted for the own station master Invalid station No setting station e Check that no station number is set for the target station Station No already set in the target e The station number has been already set for the target station station e Check that no station number is set for the target station e The station where the station number change was attempted does not Station No setting target not exist exist e Check that no station number is set for the target station Station No setting out of range Set the station number within 1 to 120 and retry the operation CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING D240 D2414 D2424 D2434 D2444 D2454 D2464 D2474 D2484 D2494 D24Ay D24B e Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated Target network No error dedicated instruction and retry the operation instruction e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the target station number at the request source of the dedicated Target station No error dedicated instruction and retry the operation instruction e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set
245. k 109 Comparison between the CC Link Safety master module Internal current consumption 5VDC 34 and the master local module 313 Comparison between the Q series master local module J and the master local module 317 _ Compliance with the EMC low voltage and machinery JPIGPIREAD 6 58 9 28 aoe aha a th eee Rew nae 160 IEC VCS pce oh alti nt hatte a elias edt cht aa ee Soca 6 JP GP REQ reading writing clock data 194 GONFIGr4 22 ss EEATT E mates nee awe ee 263 JP GP SWRITE at tictece ace e208 ote aoe nied we 187 Connecting the cable 0 00008 64 JE GPT Be a2 sataa st alae She ea ay aun 175 Constant SCAN ia id as oO See oe ee aS 83 Cyclic transmission 000 0 eee eee 102 L Cyclic transmission cannot be performed 243 Se Cyclic transmission delay time 304 fi Se I tt oc ke eae oh ok nd hep ee etek bh dagen 31 LERR EE D pene wine Bid mene ahd A Bete den Bede tu eda he poems 31 D L series master local module 15 Le Link dedicated instruction 152 DENK WE Die atate cia Se Saeed dale Sem ew de eases le a 30 LK COVICCS vio coc eR tate ae aoa aude test ow Mew etd 16 BEEN O cet ees Shree cen tre ta EE k ac 103 Link device Alea sik ea anes A we Gate es 42 DATA HINK 5 4 505 25 sist wha deat tyre ah se acs rte Moaesae 263 Link device area buffer memory address 0 to 18975 Data link faulty station setting
246. l Standard Standard Safety d station station station Point The master local module has acquired certification of the highest safety level SIL3 of IEC 61508 Category 4 of EN 654 1 and Category 4 performance level e of EN ISO 13849 1 applicable to programmable controllers 22 CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 2 High speed periodic communication cyclic transmission Since transmission delay time is short delay caused by the network does not need to be considered if the link scan time of each master local module is shorter than the scan time of the safety CPU module et Command 7 H ZN High speed Point Master local modules can perform cyclic transmissions in combination with the following functions Page 35 Section 3 3 e Auto transfer of data between the link devices in the master local module and the devices in the safety CPU module e Cyclic data assurance in units of 32 bits or per station e Status setting hold or clear of input data of standard communication to which a data link error has occurred e Station reservation for future connection and others S9 NPO BOO T J9JSC ZL 23 24 3 Non periodic communication transient transmission with programmable controllers on other stations a Reading or writing data A master local module can access programmable controllers on other stations by dedicated instructions Page 152 Section 10 1 S
247. le status between the test station and 5 _ _ equipment connected to the test station port MAC Address I Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Module Error I Information Confirmation Set B Network Event History Check the event histories occurred on network as l Reserved Station Enable the reserved station Also check the station No set a l Function Enable the reserved station from the list I I Temporary Error Invalid Station Temporary error invalid station settingjrestore Also check I Setting Restore a the station No set as temporarily ignored station from the listy l E I Selected Station Operation I p I j Start the system monitor in the selected station and check l O eel EE the selected station PLC status m I A Start the selected station remote operation and change PLC ie uleseSlecteet Tint status For the selected station Si 124 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS O Diagnosed A Diagnosed with restrictions x Not diagnosed GX Developer is connected to Mast Item il Restrictions Reference station Local safety station station Display of network configuration o diagram and error status Modules that do not support GX Devel g Eth t adapt NROPENE d FINEMA AADIS age qo eons module cannot be diagnosed Display of selected station status and error details Display of disconnected cable and disconnected station Restric
248. lease consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Set the station number in the network parameter dialog box and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e The flash ROM may be faulty Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Increase the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station target station or relay station detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e Increase the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to O
249. led perform the following measures 1 Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power off and then on the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network 2 When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 3 When the loopback function is enabled take the following measures Configure the network in ring topology without a switching hub Connecting a switching hub will cause a problem such as data link failure L gt Page 51 Section 5 1 1 3 MOPUIM 9nsoubeq 6 137 9 4 Link Start Stop Cyclic transmission can be stopped or restarted Receiving data from slave stations and sending data of the own station can be disabled in a case such as debugging Also stopped cyclic transmission can be restarted Safety communication and transient transmission cannot be stopped by link start stop 4H Cyclic transmission Master station safety station RX RWr RX RWr RX RWr Station i i No 1 No 1 Station No 2 Sand range Send range Station Local station Local station module Device e e e e e e e m e e from station No 1 to station No 1 No 1 Sand range to station No 2 Link Start Stop Send range from station No 2 eee eee ee le le le le clr tlc eth el lle w e ee eee eed Cyclic tr
250. ler main module it turns off all the outputs Create an external circuit to securely stop the power of hazard by turning off the outputs Incorrect configuration may result in an accident To inhibit restart without manual operation after safety functions was performed and outputs were turned off create an interlock program which uses a reset button for restart if CC Link IE Field Network error has been detected create a sequence program that turns off the outputs in the program If the CC Link IE Field Network is restored with the outputs on it may suddenly operate and result in an accident Design Precautions CAUTION Do not bunch the wires of external devices or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause malfunctions Installation Precautions CAUTION Use a safety programmable controller in the environment that meets the general specifications described in the QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Using this programmable controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into
251. leted when data is written in the target station y Completed station When 0 Without arrival confirmation is specified the result is regarded as normal on the own station even if the writing to the target station fails as follows e When communication ends normally even though sent data are abnormal e When data cannot be written to the target station because instructions are executed to the same station from multiple stations The target station generates an error code D2024 or D282 2 Abnormal end type bit 7 Specify the data set status in case of abnormal end 0 After S1 11 no data is set for abnormal end 1 After S1 11 data for abnormal end is set The status of the instruction completion is stored S1 1 Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error lt gt Page 246 Section 12 5 176 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by own station lt gt Page 155 Section 10 2 1 3 0000 Control CPU The access destination is the same as that of when 03FFy is selected 03E0 e Control CPU single CPU system 0000 H e CPU No 1 multiple CPU system O3D0 to 03D3y Target station s S1 3 User ee u PaE Ea When the instruction is executed by specifying a control system CPU 03D0 or standby system CPU 03D1p if system switching occurs in the target station the instruction may fail CPU module error code 42444 4
252. ller information station No 1 212 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Link Special Relay SB List The link special relay SB is turned on off depending on various factors at data link Any error status of the data link can be confirmed by using and monitoring it in the program 1 Application of the link special relay SB By using link special relays SB the status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked from HMI Human Machine Interface as well as GX Developer 2 Refresh of the link special relay SB The link special relay SB uses Transfer SB of the refresh parameters to refresh the device of the safety CPU module lt gt Page 86 Section 7 5 3 Ranges that is turned on off by users and by the system The following ranges correspond to when the link special relays SB are assigned from SB0000 to SBO1FF e Turned on off by users SB0000 to SB001F e Turned on off by the system SB0020 to SBO1FF 4 Link special relay SB list The following table shows the link special relays SB when they are assigned from SB0000 to SBO1FF Point e Available link special relays are the same for all safety CPU operation modes e Do not turn on or off areas whose numbers are not on the link special relay SB list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system e For the usage of the link special relay SB refer to the following lt gt Page 221 Section 11 3 ysI7 GS Aejay jeloeds
253. loop test is completed slave stations ay will be in online mode OO New S Set the master station safety station to Online Totalstations ooo y al ee o Normal Mode or Online High Speed Mode Co sme o g Select Online Hod Onine Nomai Mode e Normal Mode through the network parameter or Online High Speed Mode Connecting interface USB lt gt PLC module PLC Connection J Station No Host PLC type QS001 arget memory Program memory Device memory v Title File selection Device data Program Common Local Write the network 3 parameters to the Fagan A Safety CPU module Param Prog Select all Cancel all selections D i z M PLC Network Remote R v STILL STOP O RESET RUN Point During the loop test data link stops on all stations emote operation or Power OFF ON 70 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING The test status and result can be viewed through monitoring the link special relays on GX Developer Item Description e Loop test completion status SB0094 ON When completed e Loop test normal abnormal end SBO095 OFF e Loop test completion status SBO094 ON When failed e Loop test normal abnormal end SB0095 ON s9 doo 7 9 Bui Joy SISO 79 11 2 Actions if the loop test fails a Checking by GX Developer In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnost
254. m Set value S1 0 00814 Sets data for abnormal end S1 1 Setting is not required because it is set by the system s2 p202 Channels used by own station 1 sya D204 Target stations nemokno 7 sps 205 Targetstatonnumber f4 spo oe ow sma pas arvat monitoring time 0000 seconds smo o0 ons o S1 11 S1 12 to S1 15 D212 to D215 Clock data of abnormal end Setting is not required because it is set by the system Error detected station s S1 16 D216 network No S1 17 D217 Error detected station number 166 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d Program example The following program is written to the safety CPU module of station No 0 M100 MOV H81 D200 MOV KI D202 MOV HO D203 MOV KI D204 MOV K4 D205 Control data setting for MOV KO D206 READ instruction MOV KO D208 MOV K5 D209 MOV KO D210 M101 SB47 SW AO0 3 rs i O JP READ J1 D200 D250 D700 M105 M105 M106 re ee Processing program upon completion M106 fe ee a ee eA Processing program upon failure Execution of READ instruction UOE S JOYJOUY UO Ja O UOD sjqewwesbo4 94 Woy eyeq Bulpeey GVWAN d9 de v Ol 167 10 5 JP GP SREAD Reading Data from the Programmable Controller on Another Station This instruction reads data from the device of the programmable controller on another station In units of words With the SREAD instruction when data read is completed the device of t
255. master local module to check for hardware error e Hardware test lt _ gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test lt _ gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 3 The D LINK LED turns off or is flashing Check item Is the master station connected to the network and operating normally Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used Is the station to station distance 100m or less Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the specification Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Is the loopback function enabled for the master station Are other stations connected to the master local modules operating normally Is the switching hub operating normally Action If an error has occurred in the CPU module of the master station remove the cause of the CPU module error gt Page 235 Section 12 2 e Connect a programming tool which is supported by the programmable controller used to the master station Check if the master station is performing data link using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 When the master station is the module of the MELSEC QS series and there is a local station of the MELSEC iQ R series module refer to the following lt Page 320 Appendix 8 Replace the cables with 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables L gt Page 56 Section 5 2 1 Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Refer to the manual for the Ethernet ca
256. med uoljoun yoeqdoo7 9 8 123 CHAPTER 9 cc Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS This section describes how to check error locations error causes and event history by the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of GX Developer With the diagnostic function status of other stations can also be monitored When the master station is a standard programmable controller perform CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics using GX Works2 For details refer to the following User s manual for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module used 9 1 Diagnostic Items The following table lists items that can be diagnosed by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics when GX Developer is connected to the master local module The diagnostic items depend on the connected station CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Monitor Status e A I Module Module 1 Network No 1 ae Station No 1 Error zl Monitoring I S Stop Monitor I Network Status f l I Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link The Number of Set In Parameter 2 Connected 2 Scan Time 1 ms Stations Error Occurs 1 Legends I Connected Station l I MasterSafety 0 Divergence I P1 I I l LocalSafety 1 I I XE I ai I I LocalSafety 2 i I Operation Test Communication Test Check the transient communication rounte from the connecte s station to the destination station 4 Mode Online l Cable Test Check the cab
257. mming for using functions of intelligent function modules A dedicated instruction used for transient transmission with a programmable controller on another station This instruction allows a master local module to communicate with programmable controllers on the same network CC Link IE Field Network and on other networks Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H Processing that restarts data link when a station recovers from an error Processing that stops data link if a data link error occurs A function that disconnects the station in which an error has occurred and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally Stations connected after the faulty station can also continue data link A device X Y M D or others in a CPU module A device RX RY RWr or RWw in a module on CC Link IE Field Network Bit data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction 3 Page 103 Section 8 2 1 Bit data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction Page 103 Section 8 2 1 Word data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction Page 103 Section 8 2 1 Word data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station da
258. module request module source Own station Target station Clock data read Network No 1 b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB Link special register SW Baton pass status each station of station SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWOOAO 1 No 2 Remark Eo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo coc oo or oes For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the following Page 273 Appendix 3 Page 286 Appendix 4 e Devices used by a user o0 an 2 Q U fn Control data D270 to a M130 Control data request data setting command D287 S M131 Start tact oe Request data z art contac lt D291 i D300 to e M135 Completion device Response data a D305 2 M136 Completion status indication device z D 203 204 c REQ instruction clock data read setting The following program is for the setting of REQ instruction clock data read e Control data 0091 S1 0 D270 Abnormal end type i Sets data for abnormal end S1 1 D271 Completion status Setting is not required because it is set by the system sy are Grane aay ov tion z S1 3 0000y control CPU sya om Target satonsneworna sins os saone z sine oes dunes i sin sins sme 027 __ Arvalmntonng tne 000 second smo b27e Reqestdatatengh 2 ook data read S1 10 S1 11 1 12 t D282 to D28
259. module has received abnormal data ER on e The module is performing loopback e The module has received normal data gt lore e The module is not performing loopback 2 LINK FON o Linkup in progress e Linkdown in progress PORT2 connector for CC Link IE Field Network RJ45 connector Connect an Ethernet cable L gt Page 64 Section 6 3 There are no restrictions on the connection order of the cables for the P1 connector and P2 connector L ER LED Same as the P1 connector LINK LED 3 Serial number display Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate 31 32 For LED indication when the master local module is in test mode when the module performs hardware test self loopback test or loop test refer to the following Hardware test lt gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 Self loopback test 1 gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 Loop test gt Page 67 Section 6 4 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications function list I O signal and buffer memory of the master local module 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the master local module refer to the following QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design and Maintenance and Inspection 3 2 Performance Specifications Item Specifications Master station safety 1 station Number of connectable station Up to 120 slave stations can be connected to the master stati
260. mory address 0 to 18975 0 to 4A1F This buffer memory stores the RX RY RWw and RWr values 1 Remote input buffer memory address 0 to 1023 04 to 3EF This buffer memory stores the RX value The RX start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RX offset size information buffer memory address 19456 to 19695 4C00 to 4CEF C gt Page 269 Appendix 2 2 Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 1023 3FFH RX RX RX RX RX Rx RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX 3FFF 3FFE 3FFD 3FFC 3FFB 3FFA 3FF9 3FF8 3FF7 3FF6 3FF5 3FF4 3FF3 3FF2 3FF1 3FFO 2 Remote output RY buffer memory address 1024 to 2047 400 to 7FF This buffer memory stores the RY value The RY start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RY offset size information buffer memory address 19712 to 19951 4D00 to 4DEF gt Page 269 Appendix 2 3 N Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RY b15 b14 b143 b12 b11 b10 ms gt o pa DY a P D gt T 2047 7FFH RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY 3FFF 3FFE 3FFD 3FFC 3FFB 3FFA 3FF9 3FF8 3FF7 3FF6 3FF5 3FF4 3FF3 3FF2 3FF1 3FFO NY 266 APPENDICES 3 Remote register RWw buffer memory address 2048 to 10239 8004 to 27FF This buffer memory store
261. mporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station 3 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics In Network Status right click the icon of the station for which temporary error invalid station setting is to be configured Click Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station The text background turns yellow The target station is temporarily set as an error invalid station b Canceling temporary error invalid station setting 1 Network Status Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter The Number of Current Link i MS Stations Error Total Slave Stations z Scan Time Connected Connected Station MasterSafety 0 LocalSafety 1 Lt y Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station 146 In Network Status right click the icon of the station for which temporary error invalid station setting is to be cancelled Click Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station The text background turns white The temporary error invalid station setting is cancelled CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Point Station for which temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured When reservation for a slave station is temporarily cancelled temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured for the station Us
262. n No 2 D753 M115 Completion device M110 Control data setting command Control data M111 Write data setting command M112 Start contact M116 Completion status indication device c WRITE instruction setting The setting of WRITE instruction control data is as follows Device Set value 00814 With arrival confirmation sets data for S1 0 D220 Execution abnormal end type abnormal end S1 1 D221 Completion status Setting is not required because it is set by the system S1 2 D222 S1 3 D223 S1 4 D224 S1 5 D225 S1 6 D226 Channels used by own station 2 Target station s CPU type 0000y control CPU Target station s network No 1 oO Target station number Unused S1 7 D227 Number of resends 5 times eve U aie l 1 9 D229 Write data length 4 words 1 10 D230 Unused 0 S1 11 D231 Clock set flag S1 12 to D232 to D235 Clock data of abnormal end S1 15 _ Error detected station s Setting is not required because it is set by the system S1 16 D236 network No S1 17 D237 Error detected station number UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 191 01 U00 jqewweboId 94 O gd Hu FLIMM dD d e 9 04 185 186 d Program example M110 f M111 f The following program is written to the safety CPU module of station No 2 D220 MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV D750 H81 K2 HO K1 K3 KO
263. n error occurs in the safety CPU module Own station s CPU status 1 SB004A turns on If a stop error occurs in the safety CPU module Own station s CPU status 2 SB004B turns on 3 The safety CPU module status can be checked by Own station s CPU status SW004B SBO04A Own station s CPU status 1 SB004B Own station s CPU status 2 SW004B Own station s CPU status SB004C CPU RUN status own station MS Je si6ey jeloeds Yul pue gs Aejey jeloeds yurq BuIsN E L 231 11 Dedicated instructions The following link special relays SB and link special registers SW are used for dedicated instructions gt Page 152 CHAPTER 10 a Common link dedicated instruction Processing results of link dedicated instructions can be checked by Send receive instruction 1 processing result SW0030 for channel 1 and Send receive instruction 2 processing result SW0031 for channel 2 232 SW0030 Send receive instruction 1 processing result SW0031 Send receive instruction 2 processing result CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 12 Canceling restoring reserved station setting Canceling restoring reserved station setting is executed by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be executed through link special relays SB and link special registers SW 1 lt s Page 142 Section 9 6 a Canceling reserved station setting 1 Specify the station number to cancel reserved station setting in Reserved station functi
264. n of a master local module is stored the initial value depends on the master local module used Point Do not write data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 44 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION This chapter lists the procedures to be performed before operation of CC Link IE Field Network The programming chapter in this manual provides examples for each procedure from System consideration to Debug described below lt _ gt Page 209 CHAPTER 11 Check box System consideration Consider the system configuration and link device assignments Page 96 Section 8 1 1 Page 103 Section 8 2 1 Installation lt gt Page 59 Section 6 1 Mount the master local module to the safety main base unit Safety CPU operation mode check QSCPU User s Manual Check that the safety CPU module is in test mode the TEST LED Hardware Design of the safety CPU module is on after power on Maintenance and Inspection lt Page 60 Section 6 2 S Perform a unit test on each module LL Manual for slave stations Connect an Ethernet cable to each module Bell ANT r Page 74 Section 6 4 2 Perform a cable test on the master local module v To the next page 45 Check box Configuration Set the parameters for each module Network diagnostics Perform a loop test on the master st
265. nable request SB0013 oo Reserved station specification enable request accept status SB0O05E is turned on A When cancellation of the reserved station specification is completed Reserved station specification enabled status SB005F is turned on 5 Use Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 to check whether the station returned to the reserved station When the network no longer has a station for which reserved station function is disabled Reserved station function disable status SB0180 is turned off 6 When the reserved station setting is restored with error an error code will be stored in Result of reserved station function enable SW0057 7 Turn off Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 SW0187 SW0010 to Reserved station function disable temporary error SB0013 Reserved station specification enable request ee SW0017 invalid station setting Reserved station specification enable request accept SB005E ee SW0057 Result of reserved station function enable SBOO5F Reserved station specification enabled status l SW0180 to l SB0180 Reserved station function disable status Reserved station function disable status 233 MS Je si6ey jeloeds yu pue gs Aej y jeloeds yurq BuIsN E L 13 Setting Canceling a temporary error invalid station Setting Canceling a temporary error invalid station is executed by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be execut
266. nce scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT 2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off 283 ysI7 GS Aejay jeloeds yu xIipueddy Number SB0131 SB0140 SB0141 SB0150 SB0151 284 PORT2 error frame reception status master station PORT1 error frame detection each station PORT1 error frame detection master station PORT2 error frame detection each station PORT2 error frame detection master station Description Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received
267. ng in the PLC RAS of the PLC Parameter window 2 Loopback Function Setting Select whether to use the loopback function lt _ gt Page 121 Section 8 6 To configure a network in ring topology select the checkbox Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure data integrity on a station basis in link refresh between the safety CPU module and the master local module L Page 106 Section 8 2 3 83 Item Equal Assignment button dential Poin Assianment button Equally assign link devices to slave stations with preset conditions Item Start station End station Start No Total points assigned Equal assignment RXxARY Equal Assignment Start station 1 Station End station 3 Station Cancel Stat No J0 Total points pe assigned Riww Riwr Equal Assignment Start station Station End station Station Start No Total points assigned Description Enter the start station number of slave stations for which link devices are equally assigned Enter the end station number of slave stations for which link devices are equally assigned Enter the start number of link devices to be equally assigned Enter the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Assign the same link device points to all slave stations Enter the points in the field right next to the Identical Point assignment button Points entered in this field will be reflected to the Points of R
268. ng refresh parameter Start End Number of PLCs Station Type Points Reserved Error Invalid Station Alias Comment won23 Sa Stat End Points Start End id Stati L flocalStaion oo _ooFF 128 0000 co7F x1000 256 Y1000 256 WO 128 W600 128 NoSeting sd 0080 OOFF lt 1100 256 Y1100 256 w80 128 Ww680 128 NoSettina o o o ooo C CSCidC C a 3flocalStation 2 ozo O2FF T28 o100 _ 017F xi200 256 Y1200 256 wW1000128 W700 128 NoSeting O O Z o ooo o y O The part indicated in light blue shows refresh device is assigned to multiple device range Please refer to the following supplementary information in the device range contents Supplementary Information Supplementary Setting Equal Assignment Identical Point Assignment Point Clear Check End Cancel E Select a link device assignment method e Points Start Assignment Method e Points Start Enter the points and start numbers of link devices e Start End e Start End Enter the start and end numbers of link devices Default Start End Displays the number of slave stations set for Total Stations in Number of PLCs network setting 1 to 120 Station No Enter the number of a slave station connected to the network Starting from 1 default numbers are Station numbers can be set at random cannot be duplicated displayed by the value set in Total stations in network setting e Remote I O Station e Remote Device Station e Intelligen
269. ngs are set to Hold on the station where a data link error has occurred the input status of the own station upon error is held regardless of setting e Network Operating Setting gt Output Setting During CPU STOP lt Page 115 Section 8 2 6 e PLC Parameter gt Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting gt Error Time Output Mode only when the station with a data link error is a standard programmable controller User s manual for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module used 114 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 6 Output status setting for CPU module STOP When the safety CPU module mounted with a master local module is set to STOP whether cyclic data output is held or cleared can be selected 1 Active range Depending on the device set for link refresh the output status is fixed to hold or clear regardless of the setting in Output Setting During CPU STOP The table below shows a relationship between the output status of devices set for link refresh and Output Setting During CPU STOP Output setting during CPU STOP Hod Gear ALL OFF RY RWw All available devices Hold 2 Setting method Set the output status for the case where the safety CPU module switch is set to STOP Select hold or clear in Network Operation Setting gt Page 85 Section 7 4 Link refresh device Network Operation Setting Ed Parameter Mame m Data Link Faulty Station Setting Tum OFF or 0 Clear Inpu
270. nk IE Field Network diagnostics and the data link is started using a program e Data link start failed Forcibly restart the data link CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING D728 Data link start stop command Data link start was instructed during execution of data link Instruct data link z instructing stations different stop then data link start Data were written to a use prohibited SB SW or buffer memory Correct the D72By to D72C4 Illegal access to network module error Ao a p y destination address Data were written to a use prohibited SB SW or buffer memory Correct the D7304 Illegal access to network module error S destination address The area for writing history acquisition setting data for network event history D7804 History acquisition setting data full o is insufficient Reset or power off and on the CPU module e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D7814 Network module failure z e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative o The previous history acquisition setting data for network event history were D7824 History acquisition setting data error l not written successfully Reset or power off and on the CPU module e The read request by the CC Link IE Field
271. nline Normal Mode and retry the operation e Correct the number of link dedicated instructions that is simultaneously executed within the range L gt Page 155 Section 10 2 1 3 e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e Increase the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Correct the number of link dedicated instructions that is simultaneously executed within the range L gt Page 155 Section 10 2 1 3 e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING D2554 D256 D2574 D2584 D2594 D25Ay D25B D25Cy D25Dy D25E to D260 D2624 to D26D D2804 D2814 D2824 D2834 e Correct the value in Target station number control data and retry the operation Target station No error dedicated instruction e If this erro
272. ns Set In Parameter Displays the total number of slave stations set by parameter Total Slave Stations Network Connected Status Current Link Scan Time The Number of Stations Error Occurs Displays the total number of slave stations during data link on CC Link IE Field Network Displays the link scan time of the displayed network Displays the number of stations within the network where an error has occurred MOPUIM 9nsoubeq 6 131 Network Status 132 Item Description Displays the configuration of CC Link IE Field Network and each station status If station status is not displayed check if the master stations or the station numbers do not duplicate 1 Icon The module type and station number are displayed with an icon l e Click Selection 1 Connected Station eD le click Dispi he S Monitor dial A tdastersatetly0 LocalSafety 1 LocalS afety 2 oub ieee Displays the system onitor dia og box 2 e Right click Executes a test or debugging EN 4 A keys on the keyboard Move the focus to the module to be diagnosed 4 and determine it with the J Space key 1 Indicates the station connected to GX Developer own station Displays the network type and station number is displayed when a station number has not been set 2 When the text s background is colored the relevant station may have been configured as a reserved station or an error invalid station Click the
273. nsmission is S stopped Data reception from the slave station and data Cyclic transmission a Page 116 Section 8 2 7 transmission from own stations are stopped Also the stopped cyclic stop and restart A Page 138 Section 9 4 transmission is restarted Transient transmission is not stopped By presetting routing parameters communication paths through GX Developer transient transmission can be performed among stations of different network types using dedicated instructions and GX Developer a Seamless communications with the following networks can be Transient Communication with Heved Page 92 Section 7 7 achieved transmission different networks Page 118 Section 8 3 2 e Ethernet e CC Link IE Controller Network e MELSECNET H e MELSECNET 10 e CC Link using GX Developer Network configuration The network configuration can be checked on the CC Link IE Field r 3 2 Page 124 CHAPTER 9 display Network diagnostics of GX Developer Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the Self loopback test Page 62 Section 6 2 2 master local module CC Link IE Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 74 Section 6 4 2 Field Network oe Check whether transient transmission s communication path from the di Hes Communication test one Page 75 Section 6 4 3 lagnos own station to the target station is correct The history of events that occurred in the own station and on the
274. nt History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List BEBBEBEBEBEBEEBEBEBEBEBESe No BERBER BEB B BEBE RB RBBB RB RBBB RBBB RRR eee eee eee eee eee eee eee Event detected station Station No 2 Station No 1 Master Station gt Event occurrence date and time 2010 12 22 09 39 28 0010 2010 12 22 09 39 28 0009 2010 12 22 09 39 28 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo Point The number of displayed events Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics Click the Network Event History button in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Or right click a module icon in Network Status and click Network Event History The Network Event History window opens Click the History Acquisition setting button to select the events to be collected Select events to be collected and click the button Events that can be collected depend on the station type master station safety station or local station Click each title to sort the events Up to 1000 events can be displayed When the maximum is reached the events will be erased in sequence starting from the oldest one and the latest events will be displayed Incorrect display of error occurrence
275. nto the intelligent device station e RIRD reads out data from a target station e RIWT writes data into a target station e CCPASET parameter settings e UINI own Station local station number setting Note that remote RUN STOP cannot be operated by the REQ instruction 1 The following items cannot be diagnosed for modules that are not applicable to GX Developer such as the Ethernet adapter module e Display of selected station status and error details e System Monitor e Remote operation 2 Diagnosis of the following items from the master station is available only when the CC Link IE Field safety CPU operation mode in on the test mode Network diagnostics e Link Start Stop e Reserved Station Function Enable e Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore 3 When setting station No of slave stations from the master station safety station diagnosis is available only when the safety CPU operation mode is on the test mode 4 Network event history data can be collected cleared only when the safety CPU operation mode is test mode APPENDICES Function Note for replacement Reserved station specification Cannot be performed when the safety CPU operation mode is the safety mode Reserved station function disable e Cannot be performed when the safety CPU operation mode is the safety mode Error invalid station and e Even when a local station safety station is set as an error invalid station or a temporary
276. ntrolled by programs in the CPU module or other equivalent modules on the station A station that exchanges I O signals bit data with the master station by cyclic transmission A station that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station A station that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station A generic term for a local station remote I O station remote device station and intelligent device station A station reserved for future use This station is not actually connected but counted as a connected station A station that includes two or more network modules Data are passed through this station to stations on other networks Generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission Communication that allows users to access a different kind of networks without having to consider the differences as if data were exchanged within one single network A process of selecting paths for communication with other networks CC Link IE Field Network requires communication paths to be preset using routing parameters to communicate with stations on different networks An instruction that simplifies progra
277. ny Ethernet cable disconnected e Is any of the Ethernet cables shorted e Are the connectors securely connected b Broken cable latch Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction c Connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable Pulling a cable connected to the module may damage the module or cable or result in malfunction due to poor contact d Connectors without Ethernet cable Attached connector cover should be placed to prevent foreign matter such as dirt or dust e Maximum station to station distance maximum cable length The maximum station to station distance is 100m However the distance may be shorter depending on the operating environment of the cable For details contact your cable manufacturer f Bend radius The bend radius of the Ethernet cable is limited For details see the specifications of the Ethernet cable to be used g Network configuration For wiring check Page 49 Section 5 1 1 2 and Page 51 Section 5 1 1 3 to prevent incorrect wiring CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 4 Tests After Wiring This section describes loop and cable tests that should be performed after network wiring Perform these tests to the actual operating network configuration 6 4 1 Loop test The loop test checks each station s network line and parameter setting status to ver
278. o 2000 Default Blank button 91 lf Routing Parameters Set communication paths for transient transmission between a station in the own network and stations in other networks 1 Setting procedure 1 Item Target network No Relay network No Relay station No 92 Open the setting window in GX Developer W Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Routing parameters button Set parameters in the window Click the End button E Network parameters Setting the Ethernet CC IE ME BAE Description Setting range Set a relay station through which data are sent to stations in other networks by transient transmission in the own network Up to 8 communication paths can be set 1 to 239 Default Blank Set routing parameters as shown below Ex Setting to transmit data to network number by transient transmission To go to network No data passes through station No of its own network No B Target Network Relay Network Relay 1 to 239 Default Blank Station Ma Station that needs routing parameters 1 O to 120 Default Blank CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 4 Routing parameters need not to be set for stations for which routing parameters are not available e g station including a head module The station communicates with other networks according to routing parameters set to the master station Point
279. o not duplicate station numbers Data link may be stopped when the station number is duplicated x Duplication x Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 1 Gi Data link may stop h Power on order To avoid incorrect input from slave stations power on slave stations before the master station i Submaster function A master local module cannot be used as a submaster station In addition if a safety station is used in a system which includes a submaster station an error may occur in safety communications when the control is switched between a master station and a submaster station CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 2 Multi network system The multi network system is a system in which multiple networks are connected by some relay stations Up to 239 networks can be connected CC Link IE Controller Network wy Network No 2 Relay station C Network No 1 D CC Link IE Field Network LG Poi oint Only one master local module can be mounted on a safety base unit Therefore a safety programmable controller cannot relay more than one CC Link IE Field Network To relay more than one CC Link IE Field Network systems use a standard programmable controller Safety communications can be achieved among safety stations on the same network W JS S YIOMJOU NIN Z S UOHJEINBYUOD Y10M N PIO Fl AU T OO Cyclic transmission communication is available only in the same network
280. o the safety CPU module 2 Set network parameters in GX Developer as Select one from the followings CC IE Field Master station Safety J CCIE Field Local station Safety or CC IE Field Local station SSS shown in the figure to left etwork type Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations b D Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET oak Group No Station No Select Self loopback test Fnac 3 Write the network parameters set in GX Connecting interface USB lt gt PLC module r a ee Developer to the safety CPU module Target memory Program memory Device memory x Title Ij File selection Device data Program Common Local KO z A F Online gt Write to PLC Select all Cancel all selections pase J Label program FB Structure lee Program memory Device memory A MAIN r Related functions kal Device comment Transfer setup O MAIN ic e Parameter REE cee M PLC Network Remote Remote operation 4 Connect PORT1 and PORT2 of the master local modules with an Ethernet cable lt gt Page 64 Section 6 3 Ethernet cable 5 Resetthe safety CPU module or power off and on du the system OD or powering off gt on RESET RUN 62 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 Self loopback test begins MB on The MODE LED of master lo
281. oduct e The serial No displayed on Product Information List of GX Developer indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added 322 APPENDICES Appendix 10 External Dimension Diagram CC Link IE Field Unit mm wejbeiq uolIsueWIGg eu19 x34 0 xipueddy 323 Memo 324 INDEX 0to 9 Diagnostic Window 0020 eee eee 130 a lt 7 Disconnecting the cable 65 32 bit data assurance is ain aw wae hae ee SR 106 E A SSS SSS SSSas __ aaS 9 94 ERR EE Date eens So ae heed cae a ae Beet te ae E N 31 Applicable CPU modules and number of modules 58 Eio code Sincaire naana eae ee a a 246 Applicable systems 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 58 Error invalid station n aa aaa aaaea aaa 120 Assurance of cyclic data integrity 106 Error invalid station setting 120 ASVNCHTONOUS ga aa o yd ted dest oe Rate mea dd 83 Error log registration function 99 Automatic return aaa oa aaa 36 Ethernet adapter module 00 15 Ethernet cable connection 64 B External dimensions 0000000e 34 Bend radis d i Sue ar Geant decane Bede win Anchor A 66 F Block data assurance per station 83 108 PUNCHOM ISD 4 daaa a a a otek a EA 35 C G Cable Ne Strate a4 bea acids anes clove ulate E L eee 14 S
282. of connected slave stations x Ka Kb Kc Kd 1000 Number of interrupt conditions in the interrupt setting x 0 02 Ke total of all stations 1000 ms Cyclic transmission mode a 8 x4 x oos Np 4 a Total number of points of RX RY Setting in Network Configuration Settings 8 Total number of points of RWw RWr Setting in Network Configuration Settings Item Conditions Value When Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data RX RY is set in the 18 5 Ka 25 8 Network Operation Setting When Hold input data RX RY is set in the Network Operation 9 75 Setting Kb 168 Ke 160 60 x Total number of slave stations set in Maximum transient processing the parameters 80 0 when transient transmission is not performed time 0 when transient transmission is not performed Kd Maximum data link processing time when the station is disconnected from or returned to the network 9000 Total number of ports used in the switching hub x 3000 9000 when the switching hub is not used The table below shows the processing time factor of each module Add values of all stations Ke Module Value Processing time factor of each ET module Master local module Standard station 0 Other than master local module 0 303 Ql UBOS yul ZS xIpueddy w Bulssed0jg G xipueddy Appendix 5 3 Cyclic transmission delay time The following is the formula to calculate cyclic transmission delay time 1 Safety comm
283. of station No 2 is MIO SD1700 0 S cet ee Safety station interlock with x SD1700 0 SD1720 0 station No 1 is released 3 49 PAAR RST D1720 0 2 Write the program to the safety CPU modules on the local stations safety stations station No 1 and station No 2 and either reset or power them off and on XZ Online gt Write to PLC lt STOP or powering off on RESET RUN 3 Setthe safety CPU modules on the local stations safety stations to RUN TUS STOP RESET RUN p sn ae uolels puepuejs e pue suones Ajajes u ym jo jdwexg UOedIUNWWOD ZL 219 2 Standard communication among master station standard station and local stations safety stations a Devices used in the program e Link special relay SB and link special registers SW SB0049 Data link status own station SW00B0 0 Data link status each station station No 1 SWOOBO 1 Data link status each station station No 2 e Devices used by the user Device Description MO Communication condition establishment flag station No 1 M1 Communication condition establishment flag station No 2 NO Nesting station No 1 N1 Nesting station No 2 b Program example 1 Create the following program in the project for the master station standard station using GX Works2 Checking the data link status of station No 1 Checking the data link status of station No 2 Point If a response is not received for sev
284. of the Own station No out of range master station e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Multiple master stations including own 7 DRES tation e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly station e After taking the above action power off and on all the stations that detected this error or reset them e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures i against noise Network module failure l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your
285. ogram example e Program example in SREAD instruction request source station No 0 M100 i MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV M101 SB47 SW AQ0 3 MOV JP SREAD J1 D200 D250 D700 M105 M106 d 1 Processing program upon completion M106 iE Lea aie __S RR __ Processing program upon failure e Program example in SREAD instruction request destination station No 4 H81 K1 HO K1 K4 KO KO K5 KO K5 M105 D200 D202 D203 D204 D205 D206 D208 D209 D210 D207 M107 Control data setting for SREAD instruction Execution of SREAD instruction Y60 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 6 JP GP WRITE Writing Data to the Programmable Controller on Another Station This instruction writes data to the device of the programmable controller on another station In units of words Start contact D1 JP WRITE of JPWRITE Jn 81 82 or 02 D1 Start contact D1 GP WRITE Un S1 S2 or D2 D1 GP WRITE aie Available devices Setting data Internal device System user O e MS 9 8 Ht 4 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used When specifying SD SW data can be written in the range that the user can set For details on SD SW refer to the following Manuals for the CPU module and network module of the target station 1 Setting data Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 Jn 25
286. ogy line topology and ring topology gt Page 47 Section 5 1 1 For star topology a 1OOOBASE T compliant switching hub can be used lt gt Page 57 Section 5 2 2 Wiring is highly flexible because a network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies For example the control panels can be connected through a star topology and the production lines through a line topology HOMION PlP 4 Al AUIT OO pL 21 1 2 Master Local Modules A master local module is used to connect a safety programmable controller to CC Link IE Field Network The module is used being mounted on a safety base unit The module can be used as the following stations on CC Link IE Field Network e Master station safety station e Local station safety station e Local station standard station 1 Communication that ensures safety safety communication Data communication ensuring high safety safety communication can be performed Data is communicated after a safety connection is established between safety stations on the same network gt Page 96 Section 8 1 a Safety stations added on CC Link IE Field Network Safety programmable controllers and standard programmable controllers can co exist on the same network A network system with high safety can be easily established by adding safety stations on an existing CC Link IE Field Network lt gt Page 47 Section 5 1 1 Safety communication Adding a station
287. on disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 2 Turn on Reserved station function disable request SB0012 bo Reserved station function disable request accept status SB005C is turned on A When reserved station setting is cancelled Reserved station function disable completion status SB005D turns on 5 Reserved station function disable status SB0180 is turned on and the station number of the station in reserved station function disable status is stored in Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 6 When the reserved station setting is cancelled with error an error code will be stored in Result of reserved station function disable SW0056 7 Turn off Reserved station function disable request SB0012 SW0010 to Reserved station function disable temporary error SB0012 Reserved station function disable request cal SW0017 invalid station setting Reserved station function disable request accept SBO005C Sige SW0056 Result of reserved station function disable SB005D Reserved station function disable completion status SW0180 to SB0180 Reserved station function disable status Reserved station function disable status SW0187 b Restoring reserved station setting 1 Specify the station number to restore reserved station setting in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 2 Turn on Reserved station specification e
288. on safety station stations per network Local station standard 120 stations station Number of connectable safety stations per network 32 stations Maximum number of networks 239 Maximum number of Asynchronous mode 31 connections safety connections per l l Synchronous mode 8 connections station Number of safety inputs outputs per safety Input 8 words connection Output 8 words yy X 16384 points 2KB Y 16384 points 2KB RWr 8192 points 16KB RWw 8192 points 16KB 16384 points 2KB Y 16384 points 2KB safety station RWr 8192 points 16KB RWw 8192 points 16KB X 2048 points 256 bytes RY 2048 points 256 bytes Pa Maximum link points per network x lt A suoneoyineds jesauey E Master station Maximum link points per yy station Local station RWr 1024 points 2048 bytes 2 RWw_ 1024 points 2048 bytes 2 33 Item Specifications Communication speed 1Gbps Line topology star topology Coexistence of line topology and star topology is Network topology possible and ring topology An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T standard Category 5e or higher Connection cable l l double shielded STP straight cable gt Page 56 Section 5 2 1 Maximum station to station 100m max Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e Ethernet distance L gt Page 66 Section 6 3 2 e Line topology 12000m when cables are connected to 1 master station and 120 slave sta
289. on 12 3 3 If the above action does not solve the problem Total Stations set in the Network Parameter window for the master station differs from the number of slave stations on the network Correct the parameter 240 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 The L ERR LED turns on Check item Action e Check if 1OOOBASE T compliant Ethernet cables are used L gt Page 33 Section 3 2 Are the Ethernet cables operating normally e Check if the station to station distance is 100m or less L3 Page 66 Section 6 3 2 e Check if the Ethernet cables are not disconnected e Check if a 1OOOBASE T compliant switching hub is used Is the switching hub operating normally L gt Page 57 Section 5 2 2 e Check if the switching hub is on Are other stations connected to the master local modules Check if the systems on other stations are on operating normally Is the master station set to online mode Change the mode of the module to Online 1 Page 79 Section 7 2 Is there any noise affecting the system Check the wiring condition When the loopback function is enabled check if the ring topology is Is the loopback function enabled for the master station correctly configured for the port where the L ERR LED is on Page 47 Section 5 1 1 If the above actions do not solve the problem follow the directions shown in Communication is unstable Page 245 Section 12 4 6 7 The LINK LED turns off Check item Action R
290. on 7 1 6 Set the following 27 Error Time Output Mode o BY The section of Detaled Sota ba PLC Operation Made at HAW Error Page 74 Section 2 1 7 E 3 wipe noe rie ae the current page is shown EER 7g Q Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start O numbers assigned to connected modules T shows setting OF hen 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment ope rati ng exam ples ange of an input module is changed X1000 to X100F Fordetails refer to the following RA shows reference L QscPu User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals manuals a Point P h Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SPUNIT LAY ERR j i Point shows notes that r 7 S OWS POMthe intelligent function module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting i i LF Pie 30 Section 4 2 2 require attention reference pages Remark eeeeeereereerererereeereeeseereeerseeceneneesnereneneeeet When an intelligent module is connected I O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project data list emar SEES a a a aaa a a a ee i a S shows useful information 75 4 The mouse operation example is provided below E MELSOFT series GX Developer C MELSEC GPPW Project1 LD Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagno
291. ons Temporary error invalid stations can be displayed cannot be set System Monitor Po oA A Modules that do not support GX Page 235 Section 12 2 Developer e g Ethernet adapter Remote Operation module cannot perform these Page 151 Section 9 8 functions 126 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 2 Starting Diagnostics This section describes how to use CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 1 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module If a slave station cannot be monitored due to an error such as cable disconnection directly connect a programming tool which is supported by the programmable controller used to the slave station Connect GX Works2 to a slave station that uses a standard programmable controller and connect GX Developer to a slave station that uses a safety programmable controller 2 Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu XW Diagnostics lt gt CC IE Field diagnostics Point When another station has been specified as a connected station CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics cannot be started when another station has been specified in Other Station Setting of the Transfer Setup window Directly connect a programming tool which is supported by the programmable controller used to the target station and start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Start from the System Monitor window CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics can also be started from the
292. ontact your Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Model manufacturer SC E5EW series Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd 06 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 2 Hubs Use hubs that meet all the conditions listed below e Compliance with the IEEE802 3 1000BASE T e Support of the auto MDI MDI X function e Support of the auto negotiation function e Switching hub layer 2 switch 1 Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions 4 A repeater hub is not available 1 Mitsubishi product Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG T8 SQNH cc s S JUSUOGWOD YIOMION Z S Of 5 3 Applicable Systems This section describes MELSEC QS series systems that include the master local module Master local module EZZ SSeS Zs 2 2s r SZ E aa LO Sp ar apa 2 S23 3 3 3 eS Se s_S S23 sss oS gt S2 2 3 Tee r E ee aT LTr 5L Programming tool available for Applicable CPU modules and the master local modules number of mountable modules 3 gt Page 58 Section 5 3 2 L Page 8 Section 5 3 1 1 Applicable safety CPU modules and the number of mountable modules a Safety CPU module The following safety CPU module is applicable to the master local module Safety CPU module Serial number first five digits QS001CPU 13042 or later b Number of mountable modules For the number of mountable modules refer to the following QSCP
293. or STEP RUN status ON Station in STOP or PAUSE status found If a station in STOP or PAUSE status is found the status of each station can be checked by the CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of CPU RUN O status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the RUN status of the master station s CPU module OFF RUN or STEP RUN status ON STOP or PAUSE status Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the stop error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with stop error found If a station with a stop error is found the status of each station can be checked by Operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the stop error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Stop error occurred Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Number SB0110 SB0111 SB0120 SB0121 SB0130 CPU operation status each station 2 CPU operation status master station 2 PORT1
294. or reconnection in progress 40H Offline mode 414 Hardware test 42 4 Self loopback test Stores the cause which stopped the data link of own station 00 At normal communication or power on 01 4 Stop command issued 024 Monitoring timeout 05 No slave stations master station only 104 Parameter not received local stations only 114 Own station No out of range 124 Own station specified as reserved 13 4 Station No duplication own station Master station duplication 164 Station No not set 184 Parameter error Parameter communication in progress 1A Station type mismatch 20 Safety CPU module stop error 601 Incorrect ring topology configuration master station only Availability Local station Number Data link stop request SWO004A station Own station s CPU status SW004B SW004C Parameter setting status Data link start status SW0050 l own station Data link stop status SW0051 own station APPENDICES Availability Master Description station Local safety station station Stores the station No of the station that performed the cyclic transmission stop request for the own station Range 1 to 120 125 master station The cyclic transmission stop request is performed by System link stop SBO003 Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the own station s status 00 No module mounted 014 STOP Normal 024 STOP Stop error
295. ork Internal device Constant X Y M F V B T ST C D W KO HO For bit data a bit specified word device can be used For example Word device Bit No is used for the bit specification of a word device The bit number is specified in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is specified by DO A However bit specification cannot be used for timer T retentive timer ST and counter C For details on each device refer to the following QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals e The following data types are available Data type Description Bit Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device Device name Device name data 159 SUOI ONIJSU pa eoipaq UO uonezuawnooq y BuipuezsszapuN EOL 10 4 JP GP READ Reading Data from the Programmable Controller on Another Station This instruction reads data from the device of the programmable controller on another station In units of words Start contact JPREAD f Start contact GERAD f p Available devices Setting data Internal device System user Others 4 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used 1 Setting data Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 Jn 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access 16 bit binary Start I O number of the master local module of the own station Un 00 to 3Ep Upper 2 digits of the I O num
296. ork configuration display area differs from the actual configuration e Two stations are connected through a switching hub Branches are not displayed in the network configuration display area Actual system configuration GX Developer Master station safety station Switching hub i Local station safety station Station No 1 Network configuration window display Connected Station MasterSafety 0 LocalSafety 1 P1 ija e Switching hubs are in cascade connection Only one branch is displayed Network configuration display area Actual system configuration Master station GX Developer safety station Switch _ Station No 0 Switching hub i Local station safety station Station No 1 _ _ Local station safety station Station No 2 a aa Local station aaj Local station safety station safety station Station No 3 Station No 4 Network configuration window display Connected Station MasterSafety 0 Divergence PI i u P e LocalSafety 1 LocalSafety 2 LocalSafety 3 LocalSafety 4 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Item Description Displays status of the station selected in Network Status
297. ory address 19712 station No 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19713 station No 1 x 2 sessalppy Aiowayy yng jo sjieljagq z xipueddy H439rp 01 H000r 96964 0 996 sseuppe Asowew Jaynq UoeWJOjU EZISAESHO XY ZZ xIpueddy 269 Appendix 2 4 Rwwoffset size information buffer memory address 19968 to 20207 4E00 to 4EEF This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RWw for each station 199684008 9969401 99704602 19971 4E03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 2020046 20207 4EEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station No can be calculated using the following formula e Offset buffer memory address 19968 station No 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19969 station No 1 x 2 Appendix 2 5 RWr offset size information buffer memory address 20224 to 20463 4F00 to 4FEF This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RWr for each station 20224 4FOOH Station No 1 Offset 20225 4F01H Station No 14 Size in units of words 20226 20227 4F03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 20462 4FEEH 20463 4FEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words 4FO2H Station No 2 Offset The offset and size buffer memory address for each station No can be calculated using the following formula e Offset buffer memory address 20224 station No 1 x 2
298. ously performed at high speed The abbreviation for the QS001CPU safety CPU module The abbreviation for the QS0J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network master local module This module supports safety functions The abbreviation for the QJ71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network master local module The abbreviation for the LJ71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network master local module The abbreviation for the QS0J61BT12 CC Link Safety system master module The abbreviation for the LU72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network head module The abbreviation for the NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module The abbreviation for the Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network interface board A generic term for the following modules e Module on CC Link IE Field Network e CC Link IE Controller Network module e Ethernet interface module e MELSECNET H module e MELSECNET 10 module A MELSEC Q L series module that has functions other than input and output such as an A D converter module and D A converter module Data exchanged through safety communication A connection established for safety communication A function to exchange safety data between safety stations on the same network A generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr A function of communication with another station which is used when requested b
299. ow opens H W Information m Module gt r Display format Module Name QSOJ71GF11 T2 Product information 13041 0000000000 4 HW LED Information HAW SW Information mone ooo ionitor Stop monitor Close Description Switches the display format of H W LED Information and H W SW Information Shows the condition of the RUN LED 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows whether the master local module is in online mode 0000 Other than online 0001 Online Shows whether the master local module is in offline mode 0000 Other than offline mode 0001 Offline mode Shows whether the master local module is in test mode 0000 Other than test mode 0001 Test mode Item M S ERR PARAM ERR PORT1 L ER PORT1 LINK MASTER H W LED Information LOCAL TOKEN PASS DATA LINK PORT2 L ER PORT2 LINK NETWORK NO STATION NO H W SW Information CONFIG O J m CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Description Shows whether master station or station number is duplicated 0000 No duplication of master station or station number 0001 Master station or station number duplicated Shows the parameter error status 0000 No error 0001 Error Shows the L ER LED status of PORT1 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows the LINK LED status of PORT1 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows the station type master station of the master local module 0000 Local station or no parameter 0001 Master st
300. owledge XY assignment Routing parameters Assignment image Check End Cancel pen 4 al e CC IE Field Master station Safety e CC IE Field Local station Safety e CC IE Field Local station Default Blank Sama IO No Enter the start I O number of the master local module in increments of Within the number of I O points of the l 16 points safety CPU module Default Blank Network No Enter the network number of the master local module 1 to 239 Default Blank Enter the number of slave stations connected to the master station safety station including reserved slave stations This setting is available when CC IE Field Master Station Safety is selected in Network type Select whether to use the master local module as a master station Network type safety station or a local station Only one master station safety station can be set for one network BU S WOMEN ZZ Total stations 1 to 120 Default Blank e Master station safety station Fixed at 0 e Local station 1 to 120 Default Blank Enter the station number of the master local module Set a station Station No number different from those used in the same network Note that the master station safety station number is fixed at 0 19 Select a master station safety station mode Two online modes are available Select an online mode according to the system Mode Online Normal Mode Online High Speed
301. own station were received Correct the application type or the target station number at the request source and retry the operation e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative No master station Add a master station to the network Transient data command error Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly Transient error e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Although change of the target station number was attempted online from the master station the target station does not have the online station number setting function Station No setting not available for the ae e Check the manual for the target station if the station number setting target station ee function is available e If the function is supported by the model please consult your local Mitsubishi representat
302. pass status Remote Operation 0007 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mod 0006 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0005 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0004 2010 12 22 09 39 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0003 2010 12 22 09 39 07 Station No 2 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo Start the system monitor in the selected station and check the selected station PLC status Start the selected station remote operation and change PLC status For the selected station 0002 2010 12 22 09 37 46 Station No 1 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 0001 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK c Seamless access to other networks GX Developer can seamlessly access test or monitor systems composed of CC Link IE Field Network and other networks The accessible networks are Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and CC Link Seamless access enables the user to change the access target without modifying the connection between the personal computer and programmable controller For details on access range refer to the following QSCPU
303. peration instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect transient data l ae e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Network module failure e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Network module failure JSI OPO JOU G Z4 Transient data request error Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Transient reception failed e When the target station or the relay station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data send the data to the target relay station after the load on the station is reduced e On
304. points S RY Rw points per station Receiving station 128 points 16 points Standard remote yOnNpOJg Hunsixy ue ym uoswedwoy xipueddy station RX RY RWr RWw RX RY RWr RWw RX RY RWr RWw RX RY RWw RX RY RWr RWw jnpow edo Je SeW OU pue jnpow Je sewW AjajeS yUIT DD 34 ua m q UOSIUedWOD Z xiIpueddy 313 Specifications Item CC Link Safety master module Master local module QS0J61BT12 QS0J71GF11 T2 Selectable from Communication speed 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10M 1Gbps bps An Ethernet cable that meets the 1O00BASE T standard Coneco Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated Category 56 or higher double shielded cable STP straight cable lt gt Page 56 Section 5 2 1 Maximum 100m Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e lt Page 66 Section 6 3 2 Maximum station to station Maximum 100m T Pap distance at transmission speed of 10Mbps ransmission POCERO e Line topology 12000m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations 100m e Star topology Depends on the Total distance n l l at transmission speed of 10Mbps system configuration e Ring topology 12100m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations Line topology star topology Network topology Bus topology Coexistence of line topology and star topology is possible and ring topology Master station safety station local Station
305. presentative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the Network module failure hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the Network module failure hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Execute hardware and self loopback tests CPU module failure i ee e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute ha
306. ption SW0048 may be offset by one sequence scan Stores the own station s data link status OFF Normal ON Error If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by Cause of Data link status own data link stop SW0049 station Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Cause of data link stop SW0049 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off 275 ysI7 GS Aejay jeloeds yu xIpueddy Number SBO04A SB004B SB004C SB004D SB0050 SB0051 SB0052 SB0053 SB0054 2 6 Own station s CPU status 1 Own station s CPU status 2 CPU RUN status own station Received parameter error Link start request accept status own station Link start completion status own station Link stop request accept status own station Link stop completion status own station System link start request accept status Description Stores the continuation error status of the own station s safety CPU module OFF Normal ON Continuation error Stores the stop error status of the own station s safety CPU module OFF Normal ON Stop error Stores the RUN status of the own station s safety CPU module OFF RUN ON STOP or safety CPU module stop due to an error Stores the status of the received parameter own parameter status during master station OFF Parameter normal ON Parameter error
307. put Setting During CPU STOP Page 86 Section Communication Target Station No oco o Safety C icati P 90 Secti Sree eae Transmission Interval Monitoring Time Fo o e i Setting 7 6 Safety Data Transfer Device Setting oco o Page 92 Section Q Routing parameters 77 4 This parameter needs to be set for standard communication needs not to be set for safety communication Point Always set parameters Failure to do so will cause NETWORK PARAMETER ERROR in the safety CPU module Page 85 Section 7 4 78 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 2 Network Setting Set the network number station number and other parameters for the master local module 1 Setting procedure 1 Open the setting window in GX Developer KO Project data list gt gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET N Set parameters in the window Click the End button E Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards Module 4 mom ac Station No Online Normal Mode Network Configuration Setting Network Operation Setting Refresh parameters Specify station No by parameter X Safety Communication Setting 4 a Y Necessary setting No settings lreadyset Setif itisneeded No setting Already set Start I O No Please input the starting I O No of the module in HEXG6 bit form Ackn
308. r Invalid Station Temporary error invalid station setting restore Also check Setting Restore the station No set as temporarily ignored station From the list Selected Station Operation 7 i Start the system monitor in the selected station and check E M EAS ie the selected station PLC status Remote Operation Start the selected station remote operation and change PLC status for the selected station 2 If data link cannot be performed even after the above operation is performed perform the following e Checking the LEDs lt _ gt Page 239 Section 12 3 e Troubleshooting by symptom L gt Page 242 Section 12 4 238 12 3 Checking the LEDs CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING The following explains how to troubleshoot the system by the LEDs 1 The RUN LED turns off Check item Is the master local module mounted correctly Action Securely mount the master local module on the safety base unit If the above action does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test lt _ gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 2 The MODE LED turns off or is flashing Check item Is the master local module set to online mode Action Change the mode of the master local module to Online Page 79 Section 7 2 If the above action does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the
309. r invalid station setting Resetting the master station safety station or powering off the system Temporary error invalid station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the network parameter of the master station safety station Disconnecting a station for which temporary error invalid station setting has been configured If the safety CPU module on the master station safety station is reset or the system is powered off the master station safety station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SWO0E7 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Configure temporary error invalid station setting and then cancel the setting Temporary error invalid station can also be set cancelled using link special relay SB and link special register SW of the master station safety station lt 3 Page 221 Section 11 3 149 UOI EIS pijeauj 10113 Avesodwe BuyjesoueDn Buies 2 6 b Canceling temporary error invalid station setting 1 Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore if the selected station is a local station It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Temporary error invalid station will remain active until the master station is turned OFF or reset At that time all reserved st
310. r persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Correct the value in Execution abnormal end type control data and retry Execution abnormal end type error the operation dedicated instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative R tt REQ e Correct the value in Request type request data and retry the operation equest type error i e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative pe i e Correct the value in Target station number control data and retry the Specified current control station not i operation exist dedicated instruction BORIN e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Change the mode of the master station from loop test to online and retry Mode error during dedicated the operation instruction execution e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Retry the operation after a while Channel in use dedicated instruction Change the value in Channels used by own station or Target station s channel control data Change the value in Channels used by own station or Target station s channel control data Channel in use dedicated instruction A value set for the control block of the dedicated instruction is out of Invalid function version dedicated struction range Correct the value and retry the o
311. rameters are correctly set Header information error in transient Correct the header information at the request source and retry the transmission operation Error code D90Ay D90B D90C D90D DA00 to DAO1 DA10 to DA18 DADO to DAD4 DAEO to DAE3 DAE4 DAE5 DAE6 DAE7 DAE8 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Communication test data received Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of twice the programming tool take action and retry the operation e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to Incorrect number of stations 120 or less e Correct the Target Station setting in the Communication Test window Invalid communication test target and retry the operation station e Under Target Station set a station including a different CPU module from the station set in Connected Station OQwn Cable test retry error After completion of the cable test retry the operation e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the Network module failure hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi re
312. rary error Reserved station invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are temporarily canceled function disable from reserved stations request OFF No request ON Request issued Network type own Stores the network type of own station station ON Field network Stores the mode of own station Mode own station OFF Online ON Not online This stores if the own station is a master station or not Station setting own OFF Not master station station 1 ON Master station This stores if the own station is a local station or not OFF Not local station Station setting own ON Local station station 2 Condition e This is enabled when Station setting own station 1 SB0044 is off Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are returned to reserved Reserved station stations specification enable Only stations that were temporarily canceled can be returned to reserved request stations OFF No request ON Request issued Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible OFF Normal ON Error Baton pass status own If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by the Baton station pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interru
313. ration Start the selected station remote operation and change PLC i status for the selected station Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Mode Online Module Error 2 CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Module Module 1 Network No 1 Network Status Total Slave Stations Connected 3 Total Slave Stations gt 2 Set In Parameter Connected Station MasterSafety 0 Divergence i e LocalS afety 1 Ee Click LocalS afety 2 4 CC IE Field Diagnostics Network Event History Check the event histories occurred on network Reserved Station check the station No set as E Eratile the rosarvad station Ako Furction Entin the reserved stabon from the ist cary Error iaki staon Temporary error iwabd station settingirestore Also check Aare the stanan No set as temper arty gored stanon trom the k Selected Station Operation tthe system mortor in the selected station and check C chats aw System Moe oaz the selected Zabon PLC stat Remote Operation aie chad 5 lt STOP RESET RUN Point or powering off on Open the CC IE Field Diagnostics window KO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics The error location is displayed on top of the diagnostic window Click the error location Click the button on the bottom right of the window to display the error descriptions Rese
314. ration e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation JSI p09 JOU G Z4 completion wait timeout e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly Header information error in transient Correct the header information at the request source and retry the transmission operation Target station No error in transient Check that the command can be requested to all or a group of stations at the transmission request source and retry the operation Target station No error in transient Correct the header information at the request source and retry the transmission operation Own station No not set dedicated fisico Set the station number in the parameter setting and retry the operation instruction e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly Transient transmission failed e Exchange the cable connected to PORT1 with that connected to PORT2 at the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Transient data command error Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation Transient data length error Correct the data length at the request source and retry the operation Transient data request error Change the mode to Online and retry the operation 2
315. rdware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CC Link IE Field not supported by the e Use a CPU module compatible with the master local module CPU e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the Network module failure hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Clear the intelligent function module switch setting and write the setting Switch setting information error data to the CPU module again e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 259 JSI Epo JON GZ e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise DAF 1 Network module failure J e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e The flash ROM may be faulty Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measu
316. re window C gt Page 148 Section 9 7 2 Temporary error invalid station can also be set cancelled using link special relay SB and link special register SW of the master station safety station lt _ gt Page 221 Section 11 3 UOdI EIS pijeauj 10113 Avesodwe BuyjesoueDn Buines 2 6 147 2 Selecting the target module in the Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore window Temporary error invalid station setting can be configured to multiple slave stations through the Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore window all at once a Temporary error invalid station setting 1 Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore if the selected station is a local station It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations 2 a Temporary error invalid station will remain active until the master station is turned OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Error Invalid Station List r Legends Operation Method 3 Temporary Error Invalid Station sy Temporary Error Error Invalid Station fas Station That Does Not Exist No Setting Invalid Station Not Selectable Not Selectable Operation Method 1 Select the station to execute set cancel for temporary error invalid station by clicking temporary error invalid station no setting temporary error invalid station in
317. re the parameter error occurs is stored in Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 3 Details on the parameters on each station can be checked by the link special relay SB and link special register SW on each station SW0170 to SB0170 Parameter error status each station SW0177 Parameter error status each station b Checking the parameter status own station 1 When reception of parameters is completed Parameter reception status SB0077 turns off 2 Whena parameter has an error Received parameter error SB004D is turned on and the error code is stored in Parameter setting status SW004C SB004D Parameter setting status SBo077 3 When parameters are reflected in the master local module contents of the parameter is stored in the following link special relay SB and link special register SW Station No SB0043 Mode own station Mode status SB0044 Station setting own station 1 Module type SB0045 Station setting own station 2 Number of total slave stations setting Number of total slave stations current value SB0060 Constant link scan set value 550075 SBO0CO Reserved station setting status SW00C7 SBOODO Error invalid station setting SWO00D7 230 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 10 Checking CPU module status CPU module status is checked by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be checked through link special relays SB and link special registers SW 1 lt gt Page
318. rective actions following description MOpUIM onsoubeq 6 displayed in Error Factor and Troubleshooting Displays the LED status of a module and communication status of PORT1 and PORT2 gt Page 30 CHAPTER 2 Displays status of the cables connected to PORT1 and PORT2 oH o A e 4 For how to clear the station number set for a slave station in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics refer to the manuals for modules used on slave stations Normal Error cable disconnection Error other than cable disconnection gt xr Nr Communication Test button Cable Test button Link Start Stop button Performs a communication test gt Page 75 Section 6 4 3 Operation Test Performs a cable test lt _ Page 74 Section 6 4 2 Starts or stops cyclic transmission gt Page 138 Section 9 4 135 Item Description Network Event History button Displays event history of a network Page 140 Section 9 5 Information Reserved station Temporarily cancels a reservation for a slave station or reserves the slave station again unction EnNaDIE Confirmation button L gt Page 142 Section 9 6 Set Temporary Error Invalid Station st kianat Sets a slave station as a temporary error invalid station gt Page 146 Section 9 7 button System Monitor Selected Displays the System Monitor window _ gt Page 235 Sec
319. red Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Clock data of abnormal end are stored in the BCD format Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed Month 01H to 12H Year 00x to 99x last 2 digits System Hour 001 to 23H Second 00s to 59H Year 00H to 99 first 2 digits OOH Sun to O6H Sat When the target station is QnNACPU 004 is stored in the year the first two digits of the year The network No of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network No The station number of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed Master stat
320. registered trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 330 SH NA 080969ENG C OH NA O80969ENG C 1409 MEE MODEL QS0J71GF 11 T2 U SY E MODEL CODE 13JZ53 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
321. remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation e Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction e Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following range Screw Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 x 12 0 36 to 0 48Nem e To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Be sure to tighten the module fixing screw within the specified tightening torque range Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module 2 Installation environment For details on installation environment refer to the following QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 59 uogellesu 49 6 2 Tests Before Wiring This section describes module tests that should be performed before network wiring 6 2 1 Hardware test Hardware test checks the hardware inside the master local modules 1 Procedure O PES oso SS SSS See ess sss gt res 7 eH _ _____ __Medie_ e A a Select one from the followings CC IE Field Master station Safety CC IE Field Local station Safety or CC IE
322. res against noise DAF2 Flash ROM failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e The flash ROM may be faulty Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise DAF3y Flash ROM failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise DAF5 to DAF7 Network module failure 7 e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The flash ROM may be faulty Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a DAF8 to DAF94 Flash ROM failure failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 260 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 6 Checking the Master Local Module Status by System Monitor In the System Monitor window of GX Developer the network No and LED status of the master local module can be checked 1 Open the System Monitor window W
323. reserved station function is disabled the status of each station can be checked by the Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off 289 Ss 17 gS Aejay jeloeds yu X pu ddy Appendix 4 Link Special Register SW List 286 The link special register SW stores the information during data link as a numerical value Error locations and causes can be checked by the using and monitoring the link special register SW in programs 1 Application of link special registers SW 2 3 4 By using link special registers SW the status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked from HMI Human Machine Interfaces as well as GX Developer Link special register SW refresh The link special register SW uses Transfer SW of the refresh parameters to refresh the device of the safety CPU module gt Page 86 Section 7 5 Ranges to which data are stored by users and by the system The following ranges correspond to when the link special registers SW are assigned from SW0000 to SWO1FF e Stored by users SW0000 to SWO001F e Stored by the system SW0020 to SW01FF Link special register SW list The following table shows the link special registers SW when
324. retry the transmission operation e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation Network No error in transient a e If the request source is on another network check if the routing transmission parameters are correctly set e Change the system configuration so that the number of relay stations may Invalid number of relays in transient So be seven or less transmission e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation Network No error in transient i DON e If the request source is on another network check if the routing transmission parameters are correctly set Target station No error in transient Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the transmission operation Specified master station No error in Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the transient transmission operation Current master station No error in Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the transient transmission operation e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e When the own station target station or relay station detected an error ae identify the cause of the error and take action Transient data transmission i a e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the ope
325. rm a hardware test Page 60 Section 6 2 1 Select this mode to perform a self loopback test lt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 For setting example refer to gt Page 209 CHAPTER 11 80 Setting range e Online Normal Mode e Online High Speed Mode e Offline e H W test e Self loopback test e Loop test Default Online Normal Mode e Online e Offline e H W test e Self loopback test Default Online CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 3 Network Configuration Setting Set parameters of slave stations the number of points and assignment of link devices in the master station safety station Also set link scan mode and block data assurance per station This setting is available when CC IE Field Master Station Safety is selected in network setting 1 Setting procedure 1 Configure network setting gt Page 79 Section 7 2 2 Open the setting window in GX Developer KO Project data list gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt button 3 Set parameters in the window 4 Clickthe Ema button E Network Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration Setting Module No 1 figuration Setting Module No 1 SEE Set up Network configuration eget enter The column contents for refresh device will be changed corresponding to refresh parameter setting contents Points Start Please reopen the window after completing refresh parameter setting when changi
326. rounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative i e Replace the CPU module CPU module failure l eee e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CPU module stop error Check the error in the PLC Diagnostics window of the programming tool Programmable controller power failure The power is off Turn it on e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure 7 l e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure i e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The maximum number of writes to the flash ROM is exceeded e Reset the CPU module If a failure occurs again the hardware of the Flas
327. rror detected the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in nen station number S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed Master station 125 7Dy Local station intelligent device station 1 to 120 4 If Completion status S1 1 is Channel in use dedicated instruction error codes D25A and D25B data is not stored b Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored Specify the start device of the own station that stores data to be written c Start device of the target station where data is to be written If the device setting in PLC Parameter is different between the own and target stations use D1 with double quotation marks to specify Specify the start device D1 of the target station within the available range so that the write data can be stored Ex When the area addressed D150 or higher of the target station CPU is already used UOI E S JOUJOUY UO 191 01 U00 jqewweboId 94 O gd BunuM FLIMM dD d e 9 04 179 180 O Correct D50 is specified in D1 Own station CPU Other station CPU DO me 100 words D50 D99 2 a D149 D150 X Incorrect D100 is specified in D1 Own station CPU Other station CPU DO N 100 words Be D99 ii L Data to be write with WRITE instruction C Area already used by own station s CPU mi Duplicated area D100 D150 D199 CHAPTER 10 DEDICA
328. rrors on other stations 1 If other stations receive an error frame due to a line error any of the following link special relays SB will turn on PORT1 error frame reception status each station SBO120 PORT 1 error frame reception status master station SB0121 PORT2 error frame reception status each station SBO130 PORT2 error frame reception status master station SB0131 PORT1 error frame detection each station SBO140 PORT 1 error frame detection master station SB0141 PORT2 error frame detection each station SBO150 PORT2 error frame detection master station SB0151 2 When one of the link special relays SB shown above turns on the station number that received an error frame can be checked by link special register SW of the same number other than B0121 SB0131 SB0141 and SB0151 Details on the causes of error can be checked by link special relay SB and link special register SW corresponding to the station number where the error has occurred lt gt gt Page 227 Section 11 3 3 b SW0120 to SB0120 PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0127 PORT1 error frame reception status each station SB0121 SB0130 SB0131 SB0140 SB0141 SB0150 SB0151 226 PORT1 error frame PORT1 error frame reception status master station status master PORT1 error frame reception status master station SW0130 to PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0
329. rved Station Function Disable In Selected Station The text background turns orange The reservation for the slave station is temporarily cancelled Debug the slave station that has been added In Network Status right click the icon of the station to be reserved again Click Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station The text background turns light blue The slave station is reserved again CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Point Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of reserved station specification Resetting the master station safety station or powering off the system Temporary cancellation of reserved station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the network parameter of the master station safety station Disconnecting a station for which reservation has been temporarily cancelled If the safety CPU module on the master station safety station is reset or the system is powered off the master station safety station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Reserved station setting status SWOO0OCO to SWO00C7 and Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Temporarily cancel the reservation and then reserve the station again Checking the number of a station specified a
330. s Not doing so could result in electric shock Tighten a fixing screw within the specified torque range If the module fixing screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the screw or module Overtightening the screw may cause a drop due to the damage of the screw or module Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause a failure malfunctions injury or fire If the product is repaired or remodeled by other than the specified FA centers or us the warranty is not covered Completely turn off the external supply power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so may result in a failure or malfunctions of the module Restrict the mounting removal of a module base unit and terminal block up to 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector Before touching the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so may result in a failure or malfunctions of the module Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the Battery Directive in EU member states refer to the QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Main
331. s a reserved station The number of a station specified as a reserved station can be checked in the Reserved Station Function Enable window _ gt Page 144 Section 9 6 2 A reservation for a slave station can also be temporarily cancelled reset using link special relay SB and link special register SW of the master station safety station lt _ gt Page 221 Section 11 3 143 uias uoiels pesesey Buojsey buljeouey 9 6 2 Selecting the target module in the Reserved Station Function Enable window Reservation of multiple slave stations can be temporarily cancelled through the Reserved Station Function Enable window all at once a Temporarily canceling a reservation 7 Connect a slave station specified as a reserved Reserved Station Function Enable Temporarily enable reserved stations t t t th tw k Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station S a l O n O e n e O r It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station is turned OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station A Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Reserved Station List 3 Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics Legends Operation Method 4 i Reserved S
332. s enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored 300 APPENDICES Availability Master Number Description station Local safety station station Stores the station that is currently in reserved station function disable status 0 No reserved station function disable is specified 1 Reserved station function disable in progress b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO sworso 16 15 14 13 12 10 918 7 5 5 4 3 2 1 swore SW0182 swo183 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 9W0180 Reserved station swo184 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 2 function disable status SW0185 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 2 Swo186 1 12 114 1 10 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swots7 froft sofa razr r6l15 t4 i13 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored SI7 MS Ja sI6ey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy
333. s is a signal that confirms the own station s data link status e OFF Data link stop e ON Data link in progress Data link status own station SB0049 has the same signal but when using it in a program use either X1 or SB0049 only Also note that the on off conditions for X1 and SB0049 are reversed When an error occurs the cause of the fault can be checked by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics or Cause of data link stop SW0049 264 APPENDICES Appendix 1 3 Other stations data link status X3 This is a signal that confirms the other station s data link status e OFF All stations normal e ON Faulty station found Data link status each station SBOOBO has the same signal but when using it in a program use either X3 or SBOOBO only When an error occurs the faulty station can be checked by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics or Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO00B7 Appendix 1 4 Module ready XF This is a signal that confirms the status of module operation preparation e OFF N A for module operation e ON Available for module operation For the module ready timing chart refer to Module failure X0 lt _ gt Page 264 Appendix 1 1 sjeuBbls O I JO silejeq xipueddy X snyejs Yul e ep SuOe s JOUIO XIPUeddyY 265 Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses This section describes the buffer memory of the master local module Appendix 2 1 Link device area buffer me
334. s of CC Link IE Field Network LocalS afety 1 LocalS afety 2 Check the transient communication rounte From the connected station to the destination station Cable Test Check the cable status between the test station and equipment connected to the test station port MAC Address Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Module Error Displays the network event history Network Event History Check the event histories occurred on network Enable the reserved station Also check the station No set as the reserved station From the list Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 3 Temporary Error Invalid Station Temporary error invalid station setting restore Also check Setting Restore the station No set as temporarily ignored station from the list Reserved Station Network Event History Function Enable Network Event History List No Event occurrence date and time Event detected station Event history contents Selected Station Operation 2010 12 Station No 2 lt rol CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 0010 3393 Station No 1 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo System Monitor 0009 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Master Station lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 0008 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton
335. s the RWw value The RWw start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RWw oftfset size information buffer memory address 19968 to 20207 4E00 to 4EEF L gt Page 270 Appendix 2 4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 2048 800H RWw0 2049 801H RWw1 aii 4 Remote register RWr buffer memory address 10240 to 18431 2800 to 47FFu This buffer memory stores the RWr value The RWr start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RWr offset size information buffer memory address 20224 to 20463 4FO0 to 4FEF C gt Page 270 Appendix 2 5 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 10240 2800h RWr0 carers 5 Link special relay SB buffer memory address 18432 to 18463 4800 to 481 Fu This buffer memory stores the SB value OG sessalppy Aiowsayy yng jo sjieljaq z xipueddy Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of SB b15 SB F b14 SB E b13 SB D b12 SB C b11 SB B b10 SB A b9 SB 9 b8 SB 8 b7 SB 1 b3 SB 3 b2 SB 2 b1 SB 1 bO SB 0 SB 6 SB 5 SB 4 18432 4800n 18463 481F SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB H 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1F0 F4LWr 01 H0 9
336. s to calculate time from when data is set in the CPU module device of the 3 master station until the data is stored in that of the local station Calculation Block data assurance per station No block data assurance per station Suu Aejap uoiss wsue dP E G xipueddy value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x 1 LS x n3 SL x 1 SMx1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 Maximum SM x 1 LS x n3 1 i g g P es BED SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 2 SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 2 SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 2 SM Sequence scan time of the master station LS Link scan time SL Sequence scan time of the local station n3 SL LS Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer 307 w Hulss dOId G xipueddy Appendix 5 4 Transmission interval monitoring time 308 Transmission interval monitoring time is the time monitored by the receiving station for each safety connection to detect the following safety communication errors e Delay in transmission interval of safety data due to an error on the sending station e Safety data loss on the transmission path due to noise Set transmission interval monitoring time to both safety stations active side and passive side that perform safety communication gt Page 90 Section 7 6 The time value must satisfy the following formula Asynchronous mode
337. safety communication r Assignment Method Total Number of Stations i b i Tedy Host Station No U Start End Transmission Interval 5 Monitoring Time me Communication Safety Refresh Safety Data Transfer Device Setting Line No Target Open Method Monitoring Time Receive Data Storage Device Send Data Storage Device Station No ms Device Name Points Start End Start End Pa aeie osana e oo oF Ba cooo 003F gt Taret Station 2 2 Passive gt EN TeoetStetion s lt A gt Target Station Cap alactve v eof Target Statin x 64 oeo o0eF gt Target Station Pf Target Staton gt DEA gt TAA Staton _ Fraget Staton gt FTrarget Staton gt E _ Frarget statin gt M e Staton gt Frarget Staton gt Fraiget Statin gt Frarget Staton gt Faget Staton gt e Prager Stations E SEE Sa ae a a Frarget Staton gt fd Target Station Lange Staton Target Station eS ee h l l miaj o sal Safety Refresh Monitoring Time Batch Setting ms Clear Check End Cancel Select how to assign safety CPU module devices e Points Start Set devices by the number of device points and the start number Points Start Start End l Default Start End e Start End Set devices by the start and last device numbers When CC IE Field Master station Safety is selected in network setting the number of slave st
338. se check that all the items are included QS0J71GF11 T2 MITSUBISHI MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual Hardware QS0J71GF11 T2 CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CHAPTER 1 cc zink IE FIELD NETWORK 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Network is a high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet 1000BASE T 1 Data communication High speed and large capacity data communication is available between a master station and slave stations on CC Link IE Field Network A safety station can operate safety communication and standard communication simultaneously a Safety communication Data communication ensuring high safety safety communication can be performed Data is communicated after a safety connection is established between safety stations on the same network lt Page 96 Section 8 1 ae esti Sata 7 man saute aa Master station p Local station safety station safety station 1 Safety connection establishment Safety CPU Master module station Device safety station Local station module safety station Device e e e e e eee ee ll 2 Safety data transfer HOMION PlP 4 Al AUIT OO Lb After safety connection is established data is communicated Device Device 3 Safety data transfer EE ES_ EE_ EeE EEE EE eee ee 19 b S
339. specified in D1 OoOO O 100 Read data storage device Master local module Network module Sequence scan l l Read data storage device C7 i I l l l l l l l I l l l l l Target station CPU Device specified in S2 100 i I l l l l l I l l l l l l l l Read notification device ON l Device specified in D3 QFF OFF l l i 1 scan I l UOHE S JOYJOUY UO Ja OJUOD jqewweboId ay WO eyeq Bulpeey AYIYS d9 df GOL 171 e When failed SREAD Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END l I l I l I l I l I l I l 0 END 1 l I l I l l I l I l ON I I l I Start contact OFF ALOEE I l I l I l I l I l Completion device ON 5 I Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF Fad OFF l Completion status ion I I l Indication device 1 Device of D2 1 OFF OFF l i Y I 1scan_ i Completion status l Device of S1 1 TK Error cos l i i r n A a aaa a a ca a a a a a a a a A a a l I I Master local module I Channel 1 1 I Target station error 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Developer Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 12 gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According
340. station Integrity of the cyclic data is assured for each station by handshake between the safety CPU module and master local module for a link refresh a Setting Enable Block Data Assurance per Station in Network Configuration Setting of the master station safety station lt gt Page 81 Section 7 3 Once this setting is enabled on the master station safety station integrity of the data for all stations is assured for each station CC JE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Constant Scan mis 1 to 200 f Synchronous Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Block Data Assurance per Station W Assure Block Data Select the checkbox b Access to link devices During a link refresh data are assured for each station as shown below Safety CPU module Master local module Device Link device Data Station Station Data assurance No 1 No 1 assurance Data Station Station Data assurance No 2 No 2 assurance Link refresh Data Station Station Data assurance No 3 No 3 assurance Data Data assurance assurance 108 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Interlock program Data of more than 32 bits can be assured with the Block Data Assurance per Station setting disabled Use either of the following methods e Interlock using X and Y e Interlock using devices other than
341. ster Station lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station Clear Event History History Acquisition Setting Create CSV File anunnununus 3 Storing event history data a Auto save feature Since event history data are automatically saved on the flash ROM they will not be lost by powering off and on or resetting the safety CPU module Auto save may fail if performed between the time that the safety CPU module is reset or is powered off and on and initial processing is completed If failed the event Invalid event history data is displayed in Event history contents Events generated one second before the safety CPU module is reset or is powered off are not saved to event history b Storing event history data in a CSV file Event history data can be saved as a CSV file 1 Clickthe create csv Fie button in the Network Natori Evert History J Event History window and save the event history Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 7 Network Event History List Detailed Information d ata l n a C SV fi e and time Event detected station JO SIH U944 YIOMION S 6 i MUSCOPY C 4 p H ES y i 2 09 28 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo Continue error in 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Station No 1 lt lt Other St Control CPU gt gt Error Minor error or mo 2010 12 22 09 39 28 Master Station lt
342. stics Tools W XZ Online Z gt Write to PLC Disa S sael RAe l ale Select Online on th bar and then select Write to PLC Pom A Se al dE ME pia Mat lt O 3 eee sF5 F sF6j F7 Fe FO sFO cFO RIO sf sF amp aF7 aF fl ft BLS P el pel 4 BG ilala da eli aa Ea x i Menu bar Project data list Projecti 45 Program TZ Project data list gt Parameter F Device comment o gt PLC parameter Parameter l E Devi In the Project data list expand Parameter and 5 Stee ome select PLC parameter TERM Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Safety programmable controller Standard programmable controller QSCPU LCPU QCPU QnACPU ACPU System A CPU System B CPU Control system CPU Standby system CPU Control CPU Programming tool GX Developer GX Works2 CC Link IE Field Network CC Link Safety CPU module Master local module Q series master local module L series master local module CC Link Safety master module Head module Ethernet adapter module CC Link IE Field Network interface board Network module Intelligent function module Safety data Safety connection Safety communication Standard communication Cyclic transmission Transient transmission Safety station Standard station Description A generic term for a safety CPU module a safety power supply mod
343. struction e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly 251 Error code D24Cy D24Dy D24E D24F D250 D2514 D2524 D2534 D2544 252 Target network No error dedicated instruction Network module failure Target station setting error dedicated instruction Own station No not set dedicated instruction Flash ROM failure Arrival check error dedicated instruction Transmission completion wait timeout dedicated instruction Response timer timeout dedicated instruction Network module failure Action e Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative A value set for the control block of the dedicated instruction is out of range Correct the value and retry the operation e If this error persists p
344. struction that used the own station s channel 1 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion gt Page 246 Section 12 5 28 SI7 MS Ja sIBay Jeloeds yu y xIpusddy o SW0031 SW0040 SW0042 SW0043 SW0047 SW0048 SW0049 288 Send receive instruction 2 processing result Master Description station safety station Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the own station s channel 2 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion lt gt Page 246 Section 12 5 Stores the network number of own station Network No Range 1 to 239 Station No Mode status Baton pass status own station Cause of baton pass interruption Cause of data link stop Stores the station number of own station Range 125 master station 1 to 120 slave station 0 station No not set Stores the mode of own station 0 Online Normal Mode Local station Online 1 Online High Speed Mode 2 Offline 6 Loop test 7 Self loopback test 9 Hardware test Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible 0 Data link in progress 2 Baton pass in progress 3 Baton pass stopped 4 Test in progress 5 Offline Stores the cause of interruption in the communication baton pass of own station 00 At normal communication or power on 304 Cable disconnection 334 Disconnection
345. subishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error station type error e Correct the value in the station type setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error station No range e Correct the value in the station No setting data within 1 to 120 and retry error the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative station setting error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the output status setting for CPU STOP and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter error output status setting for CPU STOP error f e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error interrupt setting i e Correct the interrupt setting and retry the operation error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 255 D62Dy D630 D7014 D7064 D70By D720 D7214 D7224 D7234 D724 D725 D726 D727 256 Data link start failed Network module failure Temporary reserved station cancel temporary error invalid station setting not set Request error of tempor
346. swedwoy xipueddy b Modified functions Cyclic transmission Transient transmission Diagnostic function 318 The following are the functions modified in the master local module QSOJ71GF11 T2 Function Note for replacement Direct access to link devices Cannot be performed with the master local module QS0J71GF11 T2 Interlink transmission parameters Input status setting for Input data of safety communication from the data link faulty station is cleared regardless of data link faulty station the input status setting of the data link faulty station and the safety CPU operation mode Output status setting for Safety communication output data under the STOP status of the safety CPU module can be CPU STOP hold only when the safety CPU operation mode is on the test mode Output status setting for Cannot be performed with the master local module QS0J71GF11 T2 CPU stop error Cyclic transmission sto Cannot be performed when the safety CPU operation mode is the safety mode and restart The following dedicated instructions cannot be used with the master local module QS0J71GF11 T2 e SEND sends data to a programmable controller on other station e RECV receives data from a programmable controller on other station e RECVS receives data from a programmable controller on other station Communication by e REMFR reads out data from the intelligent device station dedicated instruction e REMTO writes data i
347. switching hub and power off and then on the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network 3 When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics L gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 Is the station number of the master local module duplicated with any of the other stations If the above actions do not solve the problem perform the following tests on the master local module to check for an Change the duplicated station number error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 e Loop test gt Page 67 Section 6 4 1 e Cable test gt Page 74 Section 6 4 2 4 The ERR LED turns on Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module mounted with the master local station whose ERR LED is on identify the cause of the error and take action lt gt Page 235 Section 12 2 If the cause of the error cannot be identified using GX Developer perform the following tests to the master local module to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 60 Section 6 2 1 e Self loopback test gt Page 62 Section 6 2 2 5 The ERR LED is flashing Check item Action Is the disconnected station displayed in the network Perform the troubleshooting shown in When the D LINK LED turned off configuration diagram of CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics or is flashing lt _ gt Page 239 Secti
348. synchronously with the sequence scan of the safety CPU module Select this item to shorten input transmission delay time when sequence scan takes much time than link scan Note that output transmission delay time will e Link Scan Mode Setting become longer Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous Cyclic transmission is performed punctually Link scan Default Asynchronous time will be the constant link scan time set in this setting However when the actual link scan time is longer than e Loopback Function Setting Supplementary Setting the specified link scan time cyclic transmission is Selected Use not selected performed by actual link scan time Default Not selected button Constant Scan While constant link scan is used to keep link scan time constant the transmission delay time is not kept constant by this function To keep transmission delay time constant select Synchronous selected Default Selected e Block Data Assurance per Station Selected Assure Block Data not Link scan is performed synchronously with the sequence scan of the safety CPU module Select this item in the following cases e To shorten output transmission delay time Note that when sequence scan takes much time than link scan input transmission delay time will become longer Synchronous e To keep transmission delay time constant Bules uoneinByuoDy YIOMION The sequence scan must be constant as well Set Constant Scanni
349. t Data RXZR4Y C Hold Input Data RXR Output Setting During CPU STOF f Hold t Clear ALL OFF uoIssilusuel DOAD Zg 3 Precautions a When Output Setting During CPU STOP is set to clear When the safety CPU module is on the STOP status data cannot be forcibly output to a slave station by GX Developer dOLS Npow MdD 104 uas snyeys jndjnO 9 Z 8 Point For output of safety communication the content set in Output Setting During CPU STOP is active only when the safety CPU operation mode is on the test mode Under the safety mode output is cleared regardless of the setting 115 8 2 Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from the slave station and data transmission from own stations are stopped Also the stopped cyclic transmission is restarted Safety communication and transient transmission are not stopped Point Page 138 Section 9 4 This cannot be performed when the safety CPU operation mode is on the safety mode 116 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 Transient Transmission This function allows communication with other stations when a request is made by a method such as a dedicated instruction Communication is also possible with different networks 8 3 1 Communication within the same network Transient transmission can be performed to other stations through dedicated instructions or GX Developer
350. t Device Station e Local Station Default Intelligent Device Station Select a slave station type Select the station type same as that of the slave station connected to the network Station Type 81 uias uoneinByuoDy YIOMION Z e Points i Setting Station Type l l range Set assignment for RX RY for each slave station gt Page 103 SRS Section 8 2 1 eee 16 to 2048 ettin J Enter values in increments of 16 points Start OOOO End Remote Device Station 16 to 128 OOOF Remote I O Station 16 to 64 e Device number 0 to 3FFFyY Default Blank e Points Setting Station Type range Local Station Intelligent Set assignment for RWw RWr in increments of 4 points for each slave Device Station 4 to 1024 RWw RWr Setting l l station 7 Page 103 Section 8 2 1 Remote Device Station 4 to 64 Remote I O Station CEE set e Device number 0 to 1FFFY Default Blank Link devices of the master local module to be transferred by link refresh and the transfer target safety CPU module devices are Refresh Device displayed This item is displayed when refresh parameters have been set L gt Page 86 Section 7 5 Set this item to reserve the slave station or to set the slave station as an error invalid station gt Page 119 Section 8 4 Page 120 Section 8 5 e No Setting The slave station is connected to the network e Reserved Station The slave station is reserved for future
351. t device of the own station where data to be written by the SWRITE instruction is stored is the same as that of the WRITE instruction lt gt Page 175 Section 10 6 c Start device of the target station where data is to be written The start device of the target station is the same as that of the WRITE instruction 12 gt Page 175 Section 10 6 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a SWRITE instruction overview The instruction writes data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the own station start device S2 into the target station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the writing of the data specified by S2 is completed the following devices are turned on e Own station Completion device D2 e Target station Write notification device D3 Own station Target station Safety CPU module Master local module CPU module Network module S2 D1 Channel 1 n m b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following K gt Page 152 Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the SWRITE instruction The execution status completion or error of the SWRITE instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SW
352. t the safety CPU module on the master station safety station or power off and on the system to retry the loop test With CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics a station where network number mismatch master station duplication station number duplication or station type error occurs cannot be selected Check the error details by directly connecting GX Developer to the faulty station and displaying the system monitor window Page 261 Section 12 6 72 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING b Checking by link special register SW Identify the error location by link special register SW and take actions After the actions execute the loop test again 1 Check the error locations and descriptions by link special register SW and take actions Error cause Action Master station duplication station number Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 checks error duplication out of range station No locations reserved station specification or station Take corrective actions by checking error codes on Parameter setting status type SWO004C gt Page 246 Section 12 5 Identify the error stations on baton pass status each station SWOOAO to SWO00A7 The following actions are taken on error stations e Replace the Ethernet cable e Adjust the total number of slave stations set to the master station safety l station to the number of connected slave stations connected stations l l l e Check if
353. ta are output in the opposite direction Page 103 Section 8 2 1 Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module on CC Link IE Field Network Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module on CC Link IE Field Network Time required for all the stations on the network to transmit data The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests Data transfer between a link device in a module on CC Link IE Field Network and a device in a CPU module Link refresh is performed in the END processing of the CPU module s sequence scan A token to send data over a network A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored Term Buffer memory address RAS READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE REQ Description An address that indicates the storage location of data assigned to the buffer memory in an intelligent function module The abbreviation for Reliability Availability and Serviceability This term refers to usability of automated equipment The abbreviation for JP READ and GP READ The abbreviation for JP SREAD and GP SREAD The abbreviation for JP WRITE and GP WRITE The abbreviation for JP SWRITE and GP SWRITE The abbreviation for JP REQ and GP REQ 17 18 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before u
354. ta link status each station SW00B7 SBO0B1 Data link status master station If the master station is powered on before slave stations data link may be reconfigured During the reconfiguration maximum 13 seconds an error is detected using SBOOBO Starting up the master station last can prevent data link from being reconfigured 224 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING b Checking data link status own station 1 Link scan time can be checked in SW0060 to SW0062 2 Ifan error occurs in data link either of the following link special relays SB will turn on e Baton pass status own station SB0047 e Data link status own station SBO049 3 The cause of error will be stored in the following link special registers SW e Baton pass status own station SW0047 e Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 e Cause of data link stop SW0049 SB0047 Baton pass status own station SW0047 Baton pass status own station SW0048 Cause of baton pass interruption SB0049 Data link status own station SW0049 Cause of data link stop SW0060 Maximum link scan time SW0061 Minimum link scan time SW0062 Current link scan time 225 MS Je si6ey jeloeds yu17 pue gs Aejey jeloeds yurq BuIsN E L 3 Detecting line errors Line errors are detected by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics but can also be detected through link special relays SB and link special registers SW gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 a Checking line e
355. ta link stop failed another process Wait for a while and instruct the data link stop again in progress Data link start failed another process Wait for a while and instruct the data link start again in progress Temporary error invalid station setting l l Wait for a while and set the temporary error invalid station again failed another process in progress Temporary error invalid station cancellation failed another process in Wait for a while and cancel the temporary error invalid station setting again progress Another station number change failed l Wait for a while and set the station number of another station another process in progress Another station number setting failed Wait for a while and set the station number of another station another process in progress In Network Configuration Setting for the master station change the station Station type mismatch type to that of the own station e In Network Configuration Setting for the master station cancel the l reserved station setting Own station reserved e Change the station number of the own station to a station number that is not reserved e Set a unique station number Station No duplication own station e After taking the above action power off and on all the stations that detected the station number duplication error or reset them Add information of the own station to Network Configuration Setting
356. ta write 8 30 00 Station No 0 Clock data write 8 30 00 Station No 3 a Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB SB0047 Baton pass status own station SBOOAO Baton pass status each station For details on the link special relay SB refer to the following lt gt Page 273 Appendix 3 e Devices used by users Control data D310 to M140 Control data request data setting command D327 D330 to M141 Start contact Request data D335 l D340 to M145 Completion device Response data D341 M146 Completion status indication device 206 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b REQ instruction clock data write setting The following shows the setting of REQ instruction clock data write e Control data 0091 S1 0 D310 Abnormal end type i Sets data for abnormal end S1 1 D311 Completion status Setting is not required because it is set by the system S1 2 D312 Channels used by own station 2 S1 3 D313 Target station s CPU type 0000 control CPU S1 4 D314 Target station s network No 1 S1 5 D315 Target station number FF y all stations S1 6 D316 Unused 0 S1 7 D317 Number of resends 5 times sye B31 Arvalmontne ne 0 second S1 9 6 clock data write S1 10 S1 11 1 12 t D322 to D325 Clock data of abnormal end Beas O S1 15 Setting is not required because it is set by the Error detected s
357. tandard communication e Periodic communication cyclic transmission Data is periodically communicated among stations within the same network gt Page 102 Section 8 2 iA Ga Ws Master station Intelligent Intelligent Local station Local station standard station device station device station safety station safety station Master station standard station Intelligent Intelligent Local station Local station device station device station safety station CPU module safety station m e e e e e e e e e e Non periodic communication transient transmission Data is communicated upon request lt gt Page 117 Section 8 3 Safety Master station Local station Safety CPU module safety station Read safety station CPU module Command request nstruction Device Response Device data Co P CHAPTER 1 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 2 1Gbps communication speed 1Gbps communication speed allows high speed communication Also the takt time can be reduced due to the improved performance of communication response 3 Use of Ethernet cable A 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet is used for the connection interface The wiring cost can be reduced because 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables are commercially available lt _ gt Page 56 Section 5 2 1000BASE T 4 Flexible wiring for system arrangements The network can be wired into star topol
358. tation i s Reserved Station fs Reserved Station iReserved Station No Setting fs Station That Does Not Exist C l l c k th e Function Enable b u tto n l n th e C C l E Function Disable Not Selectable Not Selectable Operation Method 1 Select the station to disabl d station Function or to enabl d 1 1 1 u 1 rea eee alias A Field Diagnostics window Function Enable 2 Contents that lected in direction 1 will be reflected wh ing End 7 A i Seite T Ra The Reserved Station Function Enable window opens E Reserved Station M5 Station To Enable Reserved i To Disable Station Function 5 Click a station number for temporarily canceling the E E TEEDE reservation in Reserved Station List The station Temporarily enable reserved stations number and the background turn red and orange Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station is turned OFF or reset res pective ly At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Ex a 2 Only reserved stations can be selected The background of a reserved station number is displayed in light blue icki End Setti j i PEI EEE IAEE 6 Clicking the button will temporarily 15 Reserved Station Cs
359. tation No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the stop error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Stop error b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO sworofie jisfa izn io e Je r e s JaJa T211 swo1o1 a2 81 302 28 2r 26 25 24 23 2021 20 1918 17 swor0a 48 47 ae as aa aa aa fat 40 20 26 37 26 35 24 30 swo103 64 6s e261 eo se se T87 e 56 54 53 52 51 50 40 sworosleo e 7e 7r 7e 78 7a 78172171 70 62 6 67 66 65 sworoslee esea Tea Toz Tor eo Teo Tee Ter eo a5 ee ea ez 6 swo106f1 121141 109 o8 107 tf 105 104109 10z10 100 99 98 97 sworor hannenes Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored APPENDICES Availability Master station Local safety station station O O 297 SI7 MS Ja sI
360. tation s network system S1 16 D326 No S1 17 D327 Error detected station number e Request data 00311 S2 0 D330 Request type Clock data write when all stations or groups are specified by S1 5 S2 1 D331 Sub request type 00014 clock data write S2 2 D332 cir al EON GARDS 00384 change hours minutes and seconds S2 3 D333 0000 date month no setting S2 4 D334 30084 minutes hours 8 30 Clock data to be changed 0000 S2 5 D335 The day of the week no setting second 00 seconds eyeq y2010 Bunup 6ulpesy OFY dO de 804 207 208 c Program example M140 j M141 The following program is written to the safety CPU module of station No 1 SB47 SBOAO JP REQ Jl D310 MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV D330 H91 K2 HO K1 HOFF KO KO K6 H31 H1 H38 HO H3008 HO D310 D312 D313 D314 D315 D316 D318 D319 D330 D331 D332 D333 D334 D335 D317 Control data setting for REQ instruction Request data setting for REQ instruction Execution of REQ instruction CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes programming and startup examples of when safety and standard communications are made among safety and standard stations on CC Link IE Field Network For programming and startup examples not described in
361. tative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool D0374 Incorrect number of stations oak J l l l e If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to 120 or less 246 CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D0404 Network module failure 3 e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool D0414 Incorrect number of stations ee g l l e If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to 120 or less e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D080 to D0844 Network module failure 7 e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e If the own station target station or relay station is disconnected from the network identify the cause of the disconnection and take action P e When the mode of the mas
362. tect the following safety communication errors e Safety communication stop due to an error on the sending station e Safety communication stop due to an error on the transmission path such as cable disconnection or hub failure Set safety refresh monitoring time to one of the safety stations active side that performs safety communication gt Page 90 Section 7 6 1 The active side and the passive side use the same safety refresh monitoring time The time value must satisfy the following formula Safety refresh monitoring time 2 Transmission interval monitoring time active side Transmission interval monitoring time passive side LS x 8 1 ms LS Link scan time 8 Number of safety connections on the active side gt Number of safety connections on the passive side Number of safety connections on the active side 8 Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer e Number of safety connections on the active side lt Number of safety connections on the passive side Number of safety connections on the passive side 8 Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer If time between a safety data reception and the next safety data reception on the receiving station exceeds the safety refresh monitoring time the receiving station detects an safety monitoring timeout error and stops safety communication The safety data to be received from the sending station is cleared at the time Point When the safet
363. ted Check if the master local module is in the online mode Under the offline mode the instruction is not executed 3 Executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously When executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously make sure that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated Link dedicated instructions with the same channel cannot be executed simultaneously To use the same channel for multiple link dedicated instructions execute one after completion of another The completion status of the dedicated instruction can be checked by the completion device of the dedicated instruction a Channel A channel is an area of a network module where data handled by a link dedicated instruction is stored By using multiple channels it is possible to simultaneously access from the own station to other stations or concurrently read from and write to the same network module b Number of channels The master local module has 2 channels that can be used for link dedicated instructions By using 2 channels simultaneously two instructions can be executed at the same time c Application example of channels e Simultaneous access to other stations from the own station Use a different own station channel for each request destination Station No 0 Station No 1 Own station Other station Channel 1 Channel 2 SUO HONIJSU p e ip q JO SUOIINCIDJd ZOL Channel 1 Write to station No 1 WRITE
364. ted or error completion __ Turns on when Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 x Temporary error invalid ep SBO05A setting cancel request A O aan SAUE i OFF Not accepted S j ON Cancel accepted a Turns on when Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept lt Temporary error invalid status SBOO5A is turned on and the temporary error invalid setting 4 SB005B setting cancel cancel process is completed O T n completion status OFF Not completed Ej ON Completed or error completion Turns on when Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is Reserved station SB005C function disable sect O OFF Not accepted request accept status ON Cancel accepted Turns on when Reserved station function disable request accept status Reserved station SB005C is turned on and disabling the reserved station function is SB005D function disable completed O completion status OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion Turns on when Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 Reserved station ee is accepted SBOO5E specification enable O OFF Not accepted request accept status 4 i ON Enable accepted 2 1 Number SBOOSF SB0060 SB0065 SBOO6A SB006B SBO06C SB006D SB006E SBOO6F 278 Reserved station specification enabled status Constant link scan status Loopback status PORT 1 linkup status own station PORT 2 linkup status own station
365. temporary error invalid error invalid station the master station safety station recognizes the local station safety station setting station as a faulty station if the local station safety station gets disconnected during data Other functions link Interrupt request to CPU Module IP packet transfer Cannot be performed with the master local module QSOJ71GF11 T2 function Submaster function Communication by GX Works2 GX Works2 cannot be used yONpOJg Hunsixy ue yum uoswedwoy xipueddy jnpow JedO JO SEW y PUL jnpow JedO JO SeW SOUES O 94 UBEMjeg UOSIedWOyD z xIpUueddy 319 Appendix 8 Precautions for When Connecting the MELSEC iQ R Series Module Follow the precautions below when connecting the MELSEC iQ R series module as a local station in a system where the master station is the module of the MELSEC QS series 1 Serial number of the master station Use the modules with a serial number first five digits of the master station of 16022 or later 2 When the serial number first five digits of the master station is 16021 or earlier If the serial number first five digits of the master station is 16021 or earlier set RX RY Setting in Network Configuration Settings of the master station to any of the following Action Example e Before change Number PLCs Station Type OOO TT COT I Ed 3 ____ 3iIntelligent Device Station w ET ae Intelligent Device Station v 16 0040 00
366. tenance and Inspection CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product s compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508 EN954 1 ISO13849 1 from TUV Rheinland this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard regulation or law MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving and MELCO shall not be liable for a default a liability for defect warranty a quality assurance negligence or other tort and a product liability in these applications a power plants b trains railway systems airplanes airline operations other transportation systems c hospitals medical care dialysis and life support facilities or equipment d amusement equipments e incineration and fuel devices f handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals g mining and drilling h and other applications where the level of risk to human life health or property are elevated INTRODUCTION Thank you for purch
367. tents are selected in direction 1 will be reflected when pressing End button Gs Station To Set To Temporary Station To Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station Error Invalid Station End Setting Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Restore if the selected station is a local station It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Temporary error invalid station will remain active until the master station is turned OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Error Invalid Station List Legends Operation Method Temporary Error Invalid Station Es Temporary Error Cs Error Invalid Station Ls Station That Does Not Exist No Setting Invalid Station Not Selectable Not Selectable Operation Method 1 Select the station to execute set cancel for temporary error invalid station by clicking temporary error invalid station no setting temporary error invalid station 2 Contents that are selected in direction 1 will be reflected when pressing End Setting button Cs Station To Set To Temporary Station To Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station Error Invalid Station enn E ED B End Setting g Cancel 2 v anng nn 148 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Start CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics gt CC IE
368. ter gt Network param gt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Group No Station No Loop test Select Loop test 3 Configure the network configuration setting in the Number of PLCs Station Type OOO C O network parameter gt Page 81 Section 7 3 2 a bccal Station e 0100 _c1FF __ 48 _0060 _ooFF 3 __3localStation _286 0200 _02FF tga _o100 _ov7F l Project data list gt gt Parameter gt Network param gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt File selection Device data Program Common Local Param Prog zl Select all e Cancel all see im FB Structu rogram memory Device memory OO button NEN gt _ 4 Write the network parameters set in GX Developer o rite to O ot Connecting interface lt gt PLC modue to the safety CPU module iss gt PLC Connection Ne o 7 Station No Host PLCtype JQS0OT D o Target memory aa Title R KO Online 2 gt Write to PLC H Program T kil E i pees i N ro aiaia ee 5 Reset the safety CPU module or power off and on lt 1 STOP the system O or powering off on RESET RUN 6 Loop test begins Master station safety station Local station safety station e Master station safety station a qo ae aC The MODE and D LINK LEDs flash Also each of the S 111 RUN MST S 1 RUN MST T T a Move I O o unk BG nove punk x10 LED and x1 LED repeatedly turns on and off 1 gt 2 aif sp ij M
369. ter station is Online High Speed Mode Transient data transmission response l i i DOAO Ta change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation wait timeout e When the target station or the relay station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cable connected to PORT1 with that connected to PORT2 ae and retry the operation Transient data transmission ae DOA1y Ma Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation completion wait timeout e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative me e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Transient data transmission DOA2 e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are processing wait timeout connected properly e If the own station target station or relay station is disconnected from the ISI OpOD JOU GZ network identify the cause of the disconnection and take action PETE Correct the number of the station for which transient data is to be sent DOA3 Transient data transmission error and retry the operation If the station for which transient data is to be sent is on another network
370. the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error A e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING D61B D61Cy D61Dy D61E D61FH D6204 D6214 D6224 D6234 D6244 D625 D626 D6274 D6284 D6294 D62A D62B D62Cy Parameter error device duplication RWw Parameter error device duplication e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again RWr e Correct the value in the offset or the size of the link device in the slave Parameter error device duplication station s setting data and retry the operation RY e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter error device duplication RX e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect transient data aoe e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error at e If this error persists please consult your local Mi
371. the station set in the network configuration setting of GX Developer All station errors or inconsistent number of matches with the connected station e Set the station number for the station where a station number is not set e Replace the master local modules The network is not configured in ring topology or is incorrectly configured L gt Page 49 Section 5 1 1 2 Check connection status of stations between the stations specified at Loopback station number 1 SW0070 and Loopback station number 2 SW0071 and connected Ethernet cables To use a network configuration other than the ring topology clear the Use checkbox under Loopback Function Setting in the network parameter window for the master station safety station Loopback stations exist 2 Reset the safety CPU module on the master station safety station or power off and on the system to retry the loop test 13 s9 doo7 7 9 Buu Joy SISO 79 6 4 2 Cable test Cable test checks if the Ethernet cables are properly connected Only the Ethernet cable connected to the PORT1 or PORT2 of the target station is tested For the whole network status perform the loop test lt _ gt Page 67 Section 6 4 1 1 Connect GX Developer to the safety CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 2 Open the Cable Test window Cable Test TD Diagnostics gt CC IE Field diagnostics gt pa Station Setting
372. ther station information buffer memory address 20544 to 24383 5040 to 5F3Fy 2 00 ee 272 Other station information station No 2 to No 120 44 Other stations data link status X3 40 265 Output setting during CPU STOP 85 Output status setting for CPU module STOP 115 Own station controller information 43 Own station network card information 43 Own station data link status X1 40 264 Own station information buffer memory address 20512 to 20536 5020y to 5038y 2 ee eee 271 Pi oaaae detec nee eee se oats slags tea ett 31 Pe iis ask Sar Che oe oe Gee abate See 31 PACKING Sires eneg Sta eee he sates Se Geng Bae 18 PARAM ERR vatis Sw ale a bk ais avo e Be 263 Parameter setting 00000 eee eae Tf Part NAMES orea winiaws aco Goavenata aid ona toler 30 Performance specifications 33 PORT TG ER oea do be eer dee kb ae hom dead s 263 PORT TiN apie tacd pie tad eet hee Sed ju ee as doe 263 PORTZ WER sw tion oo e e Gee heir eee 263 PORTZ LINK z tee beet ve Shad ei eo ech eed 263 Precautions for programming 209 Procedures before operation 45 Processing time 00 e ee ee eee 302 PROGFAMIMING oean aea dit toa ae wea a Aa ae are aes 209 Programming tool 000 ee ee eee 58 Q series master local module 15 ERP oso as cea ee age ees ath gad nar Saas Ue Sven a E 17 See nh
373. this chapter refer to the following Item Reference Safety communication between the master station safety Safety Application Guide station and a local station safety station Standard communication between local stations standard l User s manual for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module used stations 11 1 Precautions for Programming This section describes precautions to create CC Link IE Field Network programs 1 Safety communication program Refer to the following Safety Application Guide 2 Cyclic transmission program For a cyclic transmission program interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW gt Page 273 Appendix 3 Page 286 Appendix 4 e Data link status own station SB0049 e Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 Ex Interlock example Checking the data link status of station No 1 PuiuweIpold 10 SUONEed Id Checking the data link status of station No 2 209 3 Transient transmission program For a transient transmission program interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW gt Page 273 Appendix 3 Page 286 Appendix 4 e Baton pass status own station SB0047 e Baton pass status each station SWOOAO0 to SW00A7 Ex Interlock example Start contact 847 SW A0 0 s A a A Dedicated instruction to station No 1 210 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 2 Communica
374. timing e When completed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END I l I l I l I l I l I l I l I I l 1 i I I I l I 7 lore l Start contact OFF i OFF l 1 I l I Completion device ee i l Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF a OFF Completion status ae 1 Indication device l Device of D2 1 OFF I l Read data storage device i Device specified in D1 O e 100 i I i PARATE a e e SS a eS Se Sf Se ee ee eS I l l Master local module l l Channeli l I y i I I I Network module l I l l l l l Sequence scan 0 0 END i Target station CPU C7 i i Read data storage device l l l Device specified in S2 100 164 CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e When failed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 ENDF 0 END l l l l l l l l l l l l l m0 END l I I l l l I l l l 1 ON l l l l _ Start contact OFF QEF l l l Completion device ONL i Own station CPU Device specified in D2 OFF Pad OFF l l Completion status ION l i indication device l l Device of D2 1 OFF OFF i YY 1___iscan_ l l Completion status l l Device of S1 1 ee Error code i l i i Pees SS SS SS SS SS SS SSS SS M l eS Se eS SSS See SSS Se SS SS Se es Se l Master local module Target station error 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Developer Error details can be checked using CC Link I
375. tion D8064 Receive queue full l hive e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D8074 Network module failure z e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D80A to D80F4 Parameter error P l i 3 e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D8124 to D8134 Parameter error P l a i e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 257 Error code D814 D816 D8194 D81A D81By D81Dy D81 FH to D8254 D8264 D8274 D9024 D9034 D9054 D9064 D9094 258 e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Network module failure e Execute hardware and self loopback tests If a failure occurs again the hardware of the master local module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and g
376. tion 12 2 button Station Operation Remote Operation Performs remote operation RUN STOP and RESET operations to the safety CPU module button L gt Page 151 Section 9 8 2 If q is displayed in Network Status a If the system does not contain a switching hub Ring topology is configured even though the loopback function is disabled Take the following measures e When not using the loopback function Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any station on the network either PORT1 or PORT2 The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start e When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameters to the safety CPU module Page 121 Section 8 6 136 CHAPTER 9 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS b If the system contains a switching hub is displayed due to any of the following causes e Ring topology is configured even though the loopback function is disabled e Star topology is configured even though the loopback function is enabled e The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology Take the following measures 1 Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured gt Page 121 Section 8 6 If incorrect correct the network parameters and rewrite them to the safety CPU module When data link starts across the entire network this procedure is successful 2 When the loopback function is disab
377. tion Example of when Safety Stations and a Standard Station are Used This section shows an example of when the master station standard station communicates with local stations safety stations 11 2 1 System configuration example The following system configuration is used to explain communication between the master station standard station and local stations safety stations 1 System configuration Power supply module Q62P CPU module Q10UDHCPU Q series master local module QJ71GF11 T2 Safety power supply module QS061P A1 Input module QX10 Safety CPU module QS001CPU Output module QY10 Master local module QS0J71GF11 T2 Master station a 00 Local station we 00 Local station x a standard station r safety station j safety station Station No 0 a Station No 1 a Station No 2 a i __ fa Ethernet cable 1000BASE T Ethernet cable 1000BASE T Network No 1 jdwex uoneinbiuod Wa shS ZL p sn ase uolels psepuels e pue suoiels AjoJes u ym Jo jdwexg UuoedluNWWOD Z 211 2 Device assignment Station No 1 Station No 2 Local station safety station RX Station No 1 Master station Local station standard station safety station Safety CPU module X Station No 1 Station No 2 1 I Safety CPU module I I I X Station No 1 I Station l Station No 2 No 2 Y
378. tions Overall cable distance e Star topology Depends on the system configuration e Ring topology 12100m when cables are connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations Number of cascade connections ae Communication method Token passing method Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 85A External dimensions 98 H x 27 4 W x 115 D mm Weight 0 18kg 4 The maximum number of points for one master station is listed A local station can receive data from other stations in addition to this number of points _ gt Page 96 Section 8 1 1 2 256 points and 512 bytes when Online High Speed Mode is set 34 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Function List 3 3 1 Using the master local module as a master station safety station 1 Safety communication function ee Communication starts among safety stations on the same network Communication with safety stations Page 96 Section 8 1 1 after safety connections are established Information on errors occurred in safety stations and errors Error log registration function occurred in communications among safety stations are transferred Page 99 Section 8 1 2 to the safety CPU module and registered as error logs If an error occurs in safety communication this function cuts off the Safety station interlock function safety communication and prevents automatic resumption of the Page 100 Sect
379. tions on both stations The device status in the safety CPU module on a station sending side is stored into a device in the safety CPU module on the other station receiving side The figure below is an example of safety communication between a master station safety station and a local station safety station Safety communication between local stations safety station is also the same Safety connection establishment See ee eee a a A a Station No 0 Safety CPU Master module station safety station x station safety station xo Device Device Sequence scan Q S D Safety data transfer l 1 I e e e e e e e e e e e e E ol e e e e e e e e e e e e U eee o I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Device e eee ee Sequence I Il e e e e e e e e Output from a master station safety station The device in the safety CPU module on a master station safety station turns on The device status in the safety CPU module on the master station safety station is stored into the device in the safety CPU module on the local station safety station by safety data transfer e Output from a local station safety station The device in the safety CPU module on a local station safety station turns on The device status in the safety CPU module on the local station safety station is stored into the device in the safety C
380. tions on master station safety station x This setting can be configured only when the safety CPU operation mode is test mode Slave station number setting Page 75 Section 6 4 3 Page 74 Section 6 4 2 Moni Mon Restrictions on master station safety station This setting can be configured only when the safety CPU operation mode is test mode Page 138 Section 9 4 Restrictions on local stations Data link of the own station can be started stopped when the safety CPU operation mode is test mode Cable Test Link Start Stop Communication Test Oo sw oSOUBeIg 6 125 GX Developer is connected to Item Master Restrictions Reference station Local safety station station e Events that can be collected depend on the station type e Event history data can be Page 140 Section 9 5 Network Event History collected cleared only when the safety CPU operation mode is test mode Restrictions on master station safety station This setting can be configured only when the safety CPU Reserved Station Function Enable l 4 Page 142 Section 9 6 operation mode is test mode Restrictions on local stations Reserved stations can be displayed cannot be set Restrictions on master station safety station This setting can be configured Temporary Error Invalid Station E a Rea operation mode is test mode Page 146 Section 9 7 Setting Restore Restrictions on local stati
381. ton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the current value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission The stored value contains a maximum error of 1 ms Unit ms SW0062 Current link scan time Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the setting value of the contact link scan that is set in the supplementary setting 0 No setting Constant link scan set SW0063 1 to 200 Setting value of contact link scan time Unit ms value SI7 MS Ja sIBay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy Condition e This is enabled when Data link status own station SBO049 is off Stores the maximum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit ms SW0060 Maximum link scan time O Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off 291 Number SW0064 SW0066 SW0067 SW0068 SW0069 SWOO06A SW006B SW0070 292 Connection status own station Actual link scan time lower 1 word Actual link scan time upper 1 word PORT1 line error occurrence rate max PORT1 line error occurrence rate present PORT2 line error occurrence rate max PORT2 line error occurrence rate present Loopback station number 1 Description Stores the connection status of own station 00 4 Normal communication in progress on PORT1 and PORT2 01 4 Normal communication in progress on PORT1 cable disconnected on
382. tsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error total number of slave teat e Correct the total number of slave stations and retry the operation stations error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error link scan mode error Correct the link scan mode and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error constant link scan i e Correct the constant link scan time and retry the operation time setting error l ee e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error block data assurance Correct the setting in Block Data Assurance per Station and retry the per station setting error operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative JSI OPO JOU GZ error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error slave station setting e Correct the value in the slave station setting information setting data and information error retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mit
383. type Safety master station station safety station local station standard station Communication method Broadcast polling Token passing method Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 46A 0 85A External dimensions 98 H x 27 4 W x 90 D mm 98 H x 27 4 W x 115 D mm Weight 0 12kg 0 18kg 314 APPENDICES 2 Functional comparison a Added functions The following are the functions added on the master local module This mode can be selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the frequencies of cyclic transmission and Mode selection for bn transient transmission Page 79 Section 7 2 1 cyclic transmission ee R ERA The mode can be selected from Online Normal mode and Online High speed mode Assurance of cyclic The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station based z J ee Page 106 Section 8 2 3 data integrity units Input status setting for Select whether the input data from another station where the data Cyclic an j a Page 113 Section 8 2 5 a data link faulty station link error occurred is cleared or held transmission When the safety CPU module mounted with a master local module is Output status setting set to STOP whether cyclic data output is held or cleared can be Page 115 Section 8 2 6 for CPU STOP selected During debugging and other operations cyclic tra
384. uence scan time of the master station LS Link scan time SL Sequence scan time of the local station n1 SM LS Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer n LS x m SL Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer k SL LS x m Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer m Number of points of RWw RWr Setting set for the local station in Network Configuration Settings Number of points in RWw RWr Setting Item 0 to 256 words 257 to 512 words 513 to 768 words 769 to 1024 words e Master station RY Local station RX The table below shows formulas to calculate time from when a device in the CPU module of the master station turns on or off until that of the local station turns on or off Calculation No block data assurance per station Normal value SM x 1 LS x n3 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 2 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 SM x 1 LS x 1 SL x 1 Maximum SM x 1 LS x n3 1 value SL 2 SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 2 SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 2 SM x 1 LS x 2 SL x 2 SM Sequence scan time of the master station LS Link scan time SL Sequence scan time of the local station n3 SL LS Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer 306 APPENDICES e Master station RWr lt Local station RWw The table below shows formulas to calculate time from when data is set in the CPU module device of the local station until the d
385. ule a safety main base unit a CC Link Safety master module CC Link Safety remote I O modules and a master local module A generic term for MELSEC Q series MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA series MELSEC A series and MELSEC FX series modules This term is used to distinguish a programmable controller that uses these modules from a safety programmable controller Another term for the MELSEC QS series CPU module Another term for the MELSEC L series CPU module Another term for the MELSEC Q series CPU module Another term for the MELSEC QnA series CPU module Another term for the MELSEC A series CPU module A CPU module where the system A connector of a tracking cable is connected in a redundant system A CPU module where the system B connector of a tracking cable is connected in a redundant system A CPU module that controls operations in a redundant system A CPU module that stands by in case the control system fails in a redundant system A CPU module that controls connected I O modules and intelligent function modules In a multiple CPU system there are multiple CPU modules and each connected module can be controlled by a different CPU module A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers A high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet 1000BASE T A field network system where data processing for control and information can be simultane
386. ult of using the contents noted in this manual 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 328 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual
387. unication The table below shows formulas to calculate time from when a device in the safety CPU module of the sending station turns on or off until that of the receiving station turns on or off The formula for transmission delay time for safety communication through the following roots are all the same e Master station safety station Local station safety station e Master station safety station Local station safety station e Local station safety station Local station safety station Calculation value Formula Normal value in a stable connection SM of the sending station x 1 LS x n1 n2 SM of the receiving station x 1 Safety refresh monitoring time x 4 transmission interval monitoring time of the sending station x 3 transmission interval monitoring time of the receiving station x 4 SM of the receiving station x 3 Normal value in an unstable connection SM Sequence scan time LS Link scan time n1 SM of the receiving station LS Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer n2 Number of safety connections at the sending station 8 Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer 304 APPENDICES 2 Standard communication a Between the master station and an intelligent device station e Master station RX RWr lt Intelligent device station input The following time is shown e The time between a signal input to the intelligent device station and the CP
388. urred e A stop error occurs in the safety CPU module e An error was detected in all stations e Modules with same station number exist on the network e A network parameter is corrupted e The network parameter does not match the installation status Reserved station specification number of connected stations network number etc Flashing A data link faulty station was detected Ene Working normally Indicates the error status of the received data and the circuit When the L ERR LED is on you can check the L ER LED for P1 or P2 to see on which port the error was detected The description of the errors can be confirmed in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics lt gt Page 124 CHAPTER 9 This LED automatically turns off when the module has received normal data and loopback is completed in ring topology e The module has received abnormal data e The module is performing loopback The module has received normal data e The module is not performing loopback Displays the station number of the master local module Displays the station number Ex Station No 15 Bin WLI la x100 L E kI x1 No Lon Operates as a master station safety station station No 0 PORT1 connector for CC Link IE Field Network RJ45 connector Connect an Ethernet cable L gt Page 64 Section 6 3 There are no restrictions on the connection order of the cables for the P1 connector and P2 connector e The
389. user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsu
390. write notification device D3 is specified at the end of the arguments For details on the WRITE instruction sample program refer to the following Page 184 Section 10 6 4 Just like the WRITE instruction program example this program example is for writing data of D750 to D753 of station No 2 own station into D300 to D303 of station No 3 target station when M112 is turned on Furthermore when the write notification device D3 of the target station is turned on the data of D300 to D303 are stored in D500 to D503 a System configuration example Same as the WRITE instruction program example b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Same as the WRITE instruction program example e Devices used by users The devices used in the SWRITE instruction request source station No 2 are the same as those in WRITE instruction program example Device used in the SWRITE instruction request destination station No 3 D500 t M117 Write notification device D503 j Devices that store the data of D300 to D303 c SWRITE instruction setting Same as the WRITE instruction program example CHAPTER 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d Program example e Program example in SWRITE instruction request source station No 2 M110 MOV H81 D220 MOV K2 D222 MOV HO D223 MOV KI D224 MOV K3 5535 Control data setting for SWRITE instruction MOV KO D226 MOV KO D228 MOV K4 D229 MO
391. y CPU module detects a safety monitoring timeout error check if the safety refresh monitoring time satisfies the formula above 309 w Buissedojg G xipueddy w Huoyuow ys 14 31 AjajeS G G X pu ddy Appendix 5 6 Transmission delay time of dedicated instructions 310 The following is the formula to calculate the transmission delay time of dedicated instructions time after a dedicated instruction is issued until the execution of the instruction is completed 1 Between the master station and an intelligent device station a Master station safety station Intelligent device station standard station TD1 2 0 LS x 12 x m Rio SM ms LS Link scan time Rio Intelligent device station processing time SM Master station sequence scan time m Number of divided sending Value that Data length 480 is rounded up to the nearest integer 2 Between the master station and a local station a Master station Local station The formula for transmission delay time of dedicated instructions through the following roots is all the same e Master station safety station Local station standard station e Master station standard station Local station safety station e Master station safety station Local station safety station TD1 2 0 LS x 12 x m SL SM ms LS Link scan time SL Local station sequence scan time SM Master station sequence scan time m Number of divided sendin
392. y a dedicated instruction or a programming tool A generic term for a station that performs safety communication and standard communication A generic term for a station that performs standard communication 15 Term Master station Local station Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station Slave station Reserved station Relay station Data link Seamless communication Routing Dedicated instruction Link dedicated instruction Return Disconnection Loopback Device Link device Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Link special relay SB Link special register SW Link scan Link scan time Link refresh Baton pass Buffer memory 16 Description A station that controls the entire network Only one master station can be used in a network This station serves as a safety station or a standard station and can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with all stations When set as a Safety station the station can perform safety communication with another safety station on the same network A station that serves as a safety station or a standard station This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local stations When set as a Safety station the station can perform safety communication with another safety station on the same network The station is co
393. y the network No of the target station Target station s ies 1 to 239 S1 4 1 to 239 Network No User p network No 254 Q 254 Specify this when 254 is set for Jn Q N w fa 5 195 Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Specify the target station number 1 Station number specification Master station 125 7D Local station intelligent device station 1 to 120 2 Group specification The target station is on a network other than a CC Link IE Field Network 814 to AOp All stations in Group No 1 to 32 Can only be specified for clock data write Group No 1 81H Group No 2 82H Group No 32 AOH All stations specification Target station s FF All stations on the target station network No excluding S1 5 number own station Can only be specified for clock data write When executing instructions using the group specification or all stations specification e Specify 0000 or O3FF for the target station CPU type S1 3 gt Page 156 Section 10 2 1 5 e The group specification cannot be used for CC Link IE Field Network stations e Arrival confirmation as to whether data was written in the target station cannot be used To check whether data was written normally check the clock data of the write target station e Clock data cannot be written to the station with the station number already in use or the station with no station number setting Correct the error t
394. yu xIpueddy 273 Number SB0000 SB0001 SB0002 SB0003 SB0006 SB0009 SB0010 274 Link start own station Link stop own station System link start System link stop Clear communication error count Event count clear Temporary error invalid request Availability Master Description station Local safety station station The own station s cyclic transmission is restarted OFF No start direction ON Start direction enabled during start up Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e For SB0000 to SBO003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned on The own station s cyclic transmission is stopped OFF No stop direction ON Stop direction enabled during start up Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e For SB0000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned on Cyclic transmission of the entire system is restarted The station where cyclic transmission is restarted is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0000 to SW0008 OFF No start direction ON Start direction enabled during start up Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e For SB0000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned on Cyclic transmission of the entire system is stopped The station where cyclic transmission is stopped

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Tecumseh AJA4482YXDXA Performance Data Sheet  Téléchargez la plaquette de saison culturelle  Installationsanleitung - HERTZ Elektronik GmbH  CANOpen - Schneider Electric  Kenmore 16-Bottle Owner's Manual  iLive IKC6106DT User's Manual  TT603 IT LAVASTOVIGLIE ISTRUZIONI PER L`USO  JVC GC-QX5HD Digital Camera User Manual  A USER'S GUIDE TO DISCRETE MORSE THEORY 0. Introduction A    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file